JP2020054915A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of determining a degree of expectation toward winning in performance units under one variation performance while suppressing loss of interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a plurality of notice performances indicating degrees of expectation toward a jackpot under a variation performance, a rank of a degree of expectation indicated by each of the notice performances is separately determined. In this case, when a degree of expectation toward a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a notice performance under a variation performance, in a next notice performance (a subsequent notice performance), patterns which correspond to ranks having lower degrees of expectation toward a jackpot than that of the one rank are not selected in determination of the rank of the degree of expectation shown in the next notice performance. Thus, a decrease in degree of expectation toward a jackpot after a high degree of expectation toward a jackpot is shown can be prevented in the plurality of notice performances executed during one variation performance, thus suppressing the loss of player's interest.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variation effect (dynamic display of identification information) is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the starting opening (starting opening) (for example, a winning start). For example, three or three or three by three squares are displayed in the effective display area in the horizontal or vertical direction. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed, the symbols and the like displayed based on predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are predetermined at a predetermined stop position. If you do, it will cause a hit.

  There is also a gaming machine that not only displays a fluctuating effect on the display means, but also executes an effect that indicates a winning expectation to the player during the fluctuating effect. In many of such gaming machines, an effect that indicates a winning degree of expectation to a player is executed a plurality of times during one variable effect. Thereby, even if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is performed, by performing a plurality of effects that indicate to the player the degree of expectation that will be a hit during the fluctuation effect, the player can achieve the expected The game can be played while enhancing the feeling.

JP 2007-312981 A

  In a conventional gaming machine, when an effect indicating a winning expectation to a player is executed a plurality of times during a variable effect, the pattern of the effect performed a plurality of times is collectively determined at the start of the change. On the other hand, a method of determining the expected degree of winning in each effect unit can be considered.

  However, when determining the expected degree of win in each effect unit during one variable effect, there may be a case where an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed after an effect with a high expected degree is performed once. As a result, the player realizes that despite the fact that the player once increased the expectation of winning, the player may be less likely to win, and is disappointed with the interest in the game. May be distorted.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 obtains random information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and operates identification information based on the information obtained by the obtaining means. Main control means having a selection means for selecting a type of the variable effect that is a target display, and, in response to an instruction from the main control means, the variable effect based on the type of the variable effect selected by the selection means. Sub-control means having variable effect executing means for executing, when a predetermined identification information appears in the variable effect executed by the variable effect executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Wherein the sub-control means indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the variable effect during the execution of the single variable effect by the variable effect executing means. A suggestion effect execution means for executing the predetermined suggestion effect a plurality of times, and a selection means for selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means for each of the predetermined suggestion effects, The predetermined suggestion effect comprises a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears depending on the display type when displaying the display mode, The selection means is capable of selecting all types of the display types for the first predetermined suggestion effect in the fluctuation effect, and a counter updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined update timing; and Defining means for storing a boundary value corresponding to each of the display types when the predetermined range to be updated is associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed in the predetermined suggestion effect; the boundary value; and the counter A determination unit that determines, in the order of expectation, whether to select the display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed based on the value and the predetermined suggestion to be executed by the determination unit. When it is determined that a specific display type is selected as the display type of the effect, information storage means for storing information on the specific display type, and the gaming machine is configured to execute the predetermined suggestion effect in the predetermined suggestion effect. In selecting the display type, when determining whether to select a predetermined display type based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, the predetermined display type and the information stored in the information storage unit are determined. When the specific display type is the same, a means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestive effect, and an operation operable by the player. Operation means, and one of the predetermined suggestion effects provided with a plurality of types of effects having different display modes is executed by the suggestion effect execution means when the operation means is operated. And, as the predetermined suggestion effect executed after execution of the one suggestion effect in the variation effect in which the one suggestion effect has been executed, a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the variation effect was started. In some cases, it includes an effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the acquisition means for acquiring random information triggered by the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, and the dynamic effect of dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means Main control means having a selection means for selecting a type, and a variable effect execution means for executing the variable effect based on the type of the variable effect selected by the selection means in accordance with an instruction from the main control means. Sub-control means having, when predetermined identification information appears in the variable production executed by the variable production execution means, a predetermined game value is given to a player, The control means is configured to execute a plurality of predetermined suggestion effects for indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the variable effect during the execution of the single variable effect by the variable effect execution means. A suggestion effect execution means to be executed, and a selection means for selecting, for each of the predetermined suggestion effects, an expected degree type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means, Is provided with a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears due to the difference in the display type when displaying the display mode, All kinds of display types can be selected for the first predetermined suggestion effect. At a predetermined update timing, a counter that is updated within a predetermined range and a predetermined range in which the counter is updated are determined by the predetermined range. A defining means for storing a boundary value in a case where the display value is associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed in the suggestion effect, for each of the display types, and executing based on the boundary value and the counter value. As the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, a determination unit that determines whether or not to select the display type in the order of expectation, and the determination unit determines a specific type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed. Information storage means for storing information on the specific display type when it is determined that the display type is to be selected, wherein the gaming machine selects the display type in the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed. When determining whether to select a predetermined display type based on the value and the value of the counter, the predetermined display type is the same as the specific display type stored in the information storage means. In some cases, the display unit includes means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, and operation means operable by a player; One of the predetermined suggestion effects having a plurality of types of effects having different indication modes is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit when the operation unit is operated, and the one suggestion effect is executed. As the predetermined suggestion effect that is executed after execution of the one suggestion effect in the executed fluctuation effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the execution of the variation effect, the suggestion effect execution means Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the interest in the game from being lost.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for explaining the display screen of the 3rd design display. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating a jackpot variation pattern table. FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and FIG. 4E is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (probable) fluctuation pattern table. FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the time progress of the fluctuation effect performed by super reach A. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a preview effect by the comment display 151, and (b) is a schematic diagram in a preview effect by the child character appearance 152. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on a display device 81. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by super reach selection 153. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the character appearance 154. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the cut-in image displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by cut-in 155. It is a figure explaining the mode which shows the expectation degree of the big hit in each announcement effect, and the judgment upper limit pointer given to each expectation degree. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table for change typically. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of an additional data table. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect rank determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6A is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 7B is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending ball count command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a fixed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 4C is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is. 6 is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a comparison process performed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect rank determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the first rank determination table 222c1, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the second rank determination table 222c2. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the third rank determination table 222c3, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the fourth rank determination table 222c4, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the 5 rank determination table 222c5. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect rank determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect rank determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a change setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the notice effect rank determination processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 51. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination.

  A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is a button for receiving an operation instruction (for example, a pressing instruction) by the player. When the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is given, the pachinko machine 10 changes the screen display of the third symbol display device 81 described later, or changes the output sound or the lamp display, so that the player can enter the game. You can participate actively.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the illumination part 32 on the right side, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance opening (starting opening) 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a fluctuation display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the fluctuation is performed in accordance with a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning), or a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed. A symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting prize is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball (reserved ball) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance hole 64, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not, and if the jackpot is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability-change jackpot, a 2R probability-change jackpot, and a time-saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type if the jackpot is a jackpot.

  Here, "15R probability variable jackpot" is a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and "2R probability variable jackpot" means a maximum round number of two rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “time saving big hit” is a big hit in which the state shifts to the low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and changes to the time saving state for a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. In the high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment, the hitting probability of a second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later increases, and the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened. Includes a game state in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 by being easy.

  On the other hand, the “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of change is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of hit is lower than that in the case of probability change. In the “low probability state”, the time saving state (medium time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains unchanged, and only the winning probability of the second symbol (normal symbol) increases. This refers to a state of a game in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64 because the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is easily opened.

  In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened, or the time of one hit in the second symbol The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed. For example, the time-saving state or the high-probability state of the low-probability state may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is longer than other game states. In addition, the time-saving state or the high-probability state of the low-probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the electric accessory in one time in the second symbol is larger than that in other game states.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 has a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of a third symbol while synchronizing with a variable display on the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). (Hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and an LED that variably displays the second symbol (normal symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 5 and 14), which will be described later. And the right three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and a variation display (variation effect) in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided. Is being done. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. Also, FIG. 4 schematically shows the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed by the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation effect ends. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation effect in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which the odd numbers are added are performed. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable effect in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even-numbered symbols are arranged is performed.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three regions. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a suspended display area Ds.

  The variable display area Dm is an area in which a variable effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  Further, in the variable display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each symbol column Z1 to Z3. Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three rows are displayed in the variable display area Dm.

  Here, the middle section of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set as an active line L1, and in each game (variable effect), the active lines are arranged in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on L1. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of large hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1, a big hit is achieved and a large hit effect is performed.

  The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, and the like on the back side of the third symbol, displays a notice effect while the variable effect is being performed in the variable display area Dm, and provides a big hit effect at the time of a big hit. For example, it is an area for displaying various effect images.

  Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests the expectation that will be a big hit in the currently performed fluctuation effect, and the content of the image displayed in the notice effect will allow the player to know the expectation that will be the big hit. It has become. The player can increase the sense of expectation to be a big hit by watching the notice effect displayed during the fluctuation effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a fluctuating effect with a short fluctuating time to a fluctuating effect with a long fluctuating time are prepared, and the notice effect is configured to be executed more frequently as the fluctuating effect has a longer fluctuating time. The reason is that if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is long, the player may get bored until the stop display is performed. Can give a sense of expectation to the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game and to continue the game.

  In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the notice effect is displayed in the effect display area Db only when the player operates the frame button 22 during the predetermined period of the variable effect, with respect to some of the advance effects, so The degree is displayed. Thereby, the player can be encouraged to operate the frame button 22 during the fluctuation effect, and the player can actively participate in the gaming machine.

  The details of the notice effect displayed in the effect display area Db will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the effect display area Db, a back image according to the stage of the effect is displayed on the back side of the character and the character information. The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Then, a variable effect (variation for performing a variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol), a reach effect, a notice effect, and the like, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 described later. Various productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period in which the variable effect is not performed, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, “the city stage” → “the sky stage” → “the island” It is changed repeatedly in the order of “stage” → “city stage” →. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  The reserved display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance port 64. Although the details will be described later, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry Is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved display area Ds.

  One reserved ball number symbol is displayed per reserved ball number in the reserved display area Ds, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Indicates that there are four balls. Further, when the reserved ball count symbol is not displayed in the reserved display area Ds, it indicates that the reserved ball count is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. From the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved display area Ds, the player can grasp the number of reserved balls reserved at that time.

  Note that, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four differs by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in an aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12, etc., are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opening). ). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls to be passed through the second entrance 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). . Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance (starting winning opening) 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery, and the variable effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). After a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation effect is stopped, a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and a third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the third symbol display. The display is stopped on the effective line L1 of the device 81 (variable display area Dm). Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the entry is suspended up to four times. . The fluctuating effect corresponding to the suspended ball (reserved ball) is performed after the fluctuating effect corresponding to the retained ball that has been suspended before that is completed. As described above, the number of reserved balls (reserved ball number) is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved display area Ds.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four, but may be three. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and temporarily stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 in the ROM 202 and various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a departure variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used for controlling these processes. The RAM 203 controls main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (eg, jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, and the like). Various counters are provided for the operation.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting an initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 28). Further, some counters are updated irregularly even during the main processing (see FIG. 28). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at each counter update timing for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The suspension area stores the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Is an area for temporarily storing (holding). The execution area stores a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine a change pattern and a stop type of a jackpot lottery and a change effect at a change start timing. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no hold in the hold area and all of the hold first to fourth areas are empty areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first hold area, the value of each counter is stored in the second hold area. If there are two holds in the hold area and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the hold first and second areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the hold third area. When there are three holds in the hold area and the values of the respective counters are stored only in the hold first to third areas, the values of the respective counters are stored in the hold fourth area. In this way, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning prize are stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of the starting winning prize. Can be. If the start winning is detected when the values of the respective counters are stored in all the reserved first to fourth areas, the values of the respective counters at that time are discarded without being reserved. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four start winnings.

  Also, at the start timing of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 transfers the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, a jackpot lottery, a variation pattern of the variation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

  Further, after the values of the respective counters in the first reserved area are moved to the execution area, the values of the respective counters stored in the second reserved area are shifted to the empty first reserved area and stored in the third reserved area. The values of the respective counters are shifted to the vacant second area, and the values of the respective counters stored in the fourth area are shifted to the vacant third area. Thus, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is opened.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter used for a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The first random number counter C1 is updated by adding one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reaches a maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). This is done by returning to 0 later. Further, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the update is periodically performed from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is obtained. Is set in the first random number counter C1 as a new initial value, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also formed of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated not only once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, but also repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 28).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64. Then, at the start of the change, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is a random number value (big hit random number value; also referred to as a hit value) which is a big hit. Perform a lottery. The value of the random number to be a jackpot (the jackpot random number value) is set by a jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the reserved ball storage area 203c (executing the reserved ball storage area 203c) If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in (area) matches the big random number value set by the big random number table 202a, it is determined to be a big hit.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value (the jackpot random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random value that is referred to when the gaming state is in a low probability state (that is, a period during which the probability is not being changed) and a jackpot random value that is referred to when the gaming state is in a high probability state (that is, when the probability is being changed). And the number of jackpot random numbers contained therein is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 899. In addition, the number of jackpot random numbers that make a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value “7, 307, 582” is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the “low probability state”. . On the other hand, the number of the jackpot random numbers that become the jackpot in the high probability state is 30, and the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 "are associated with the" high probability state "and are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is stored.

  When performing a jackpot determination, the MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value suitable for the gaming state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, the MPU 201 determines whether the value of the first random number counter C1 (first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area 203c) used for the jackpot determination is the big random number read from the big random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined to be a big hit.

  In other words, when the gaming state is the low probability state, the big hit is obtained when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of “7, 307, 582”. Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the big hit probability in the low probability state is 1/300. When the gaming state is the high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 826, 866, 892 ". Accordingly, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The jackpot random value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the jackpot random number value, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the jackpot is determined. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the value of the random number to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the type of a big hit in the case of a big hit. The first hit type counter C2 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is obtained. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins in the first entrance 64 (start winning), Along with the first random number counter C1, it is stored in any one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect. Also, the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of departure. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number with a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the big hit. . In this case, the change pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The big hit type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the big hit type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the big hit type table 202b is a table in which the big hit types are associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a “15R normal big hit” that is a time saving state during the number of times of change, and a “2R certain variable big hit” where the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of big hits.

  In the big hit type table 202b, each big hit type is associated with a value of a first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability change jackpot, and the value “40-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ", and the value" 80-99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability change jackpot.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability change big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “20”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probable big hit” is determined as the big hit type.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of a stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "stop type") in the case of a deviation, and is added, for example, one by one in the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of the off-state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3. As the stop type selected in the present embodiment, after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and is stopped. There are three stop (staging) patterns: "reach other than front and rear departures" in which the stop occurs except before and after the reach symbol, and "complete departure" in which no reach occurs.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the value of the RAM 203 is registered at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). The ball is stored in any of the first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a random number with a big hit, that is, if it is a random number to be lost, the type of stop in the variable effect. Is the one when it comes off. In this case, the type of stop at that time is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop types are selected are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as wide as 0 to 89 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, It becomes easy to select "completely out of order". In this table, “reach out of front and back” is 98, 99, “reach other than back and forth out” is 90 to 97, and the range of random numbers corresponding to “reach out of front and back” and “reach other than back and forth out” is narrow. It is difficult to select "reach out of reach" or "reach other than back and forth."

  In the case of the low probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a loop counter used for determining a variation pattern, and is configured to be added, for example, one by one in a range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). I have. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 28).

  At the start of the change, the MPU 201 refers to the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the change pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and sets the change pattern to be executed in the change type counter CS1 change effect. To determine. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

  That is, the main controller 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, a specific variation mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select a third pattern from among the variation modes in which the variation display is possible with the variation time. The details of the variation of the third symbol displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. In addition to the output, the lamps of the lamp display device 227 (the illuminated units 29 to 33) are turned on and flashed.

  As described above, the main control device 110 determines only the change time as the process of determining the change pattern, and the details of the change mode according to the change time are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining a fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. In comparison with the case where the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, the determination process of the variation pattern of the main control device 110 can be easily performed. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the like. There is a possibility that the command must be composed of bytes or more, and transmission and reception of the command may be complicated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. Therefore, if only the information regarding the determined fluctuation time is notified to the sound lamp controller 113 and the like. Often, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complicated transmission and reception of the command. Further, even if the main control device 110 determines only the variation time of the symbol variation, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the variation mode according to the designated variation time from among many variation modes. In addition, since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform variable display in the determined variation mode, it is possible to provide a variety of variable effects to the player, and to enhance the interest of the player. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, as a variation pattern table used to determine a variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c used at the time of a jackpot, and a variation pattern table used at the time of a miss. A deviation pattern table 202d for deviation is provided. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for deviation, a variation pattern for deviation (probability variation) according to whether the game state is a time reduction state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, or a normal low probability state excluding the time reduction state. A table 202d2 and a variation pattern table 202d1 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

  Here, the details of the various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups based on the jackpot types. Specifically, it is classified into a 15R jackpot common referred to when the jackpot type is the 15R variable jackpot or 15R regular jackpot, and a dedicated 2R variable jackpot referred to when the jackpot type is the 2R constant jackpot. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a big random number at the start of the change, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is changed to the big hit type. Accordingly, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

  Common to the 15R jackpots are fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and fluctuation B of a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. The correspondence between the fluctuations A and B and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is that the fluctuation A is 0 to 39 and the fluctuation B is 40 to 198.

  When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the normal reach mode under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a super-reach mode under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  The no-reach is a reach in which the fluctuation time is short, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (a so-called bitter stop and the symbols are aligned). The super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach developed from the long reach or the normal reach). Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot, it is easy to select the super reach in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that the normal reach is also selected, it is possible to provide a gaming ability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, as the normal reach and the super reach executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, many having different effect contents even with the same fluctuation time are prepared. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, a predetermined character or character information is displayed once or plural times when two symbols on the activated line L1 are in the reach state with the same symbol and at another timing. Reach to display the times and perform a notice effect is prepared. In addition, various characters are also displayed in this case. Furthermore, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are prepared, such as a reach to quickly change and display the back image, a reach to add a notice effect before the start of fluctuation, a reach to add a large hit effect by re-change, etc. ing. Thereby, various fluctuation effects can be executed, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. The reach in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the one variable effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 31 seconds, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is the 2R-variable jackpot, the 2R variation (31 seconds) is determined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  When 2R variation (31 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, one aspect is selected from a plurality of variation aspects dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , A fluctuation effect is performed in the selected mode. As the variation mode dedicated to the 2R probability change jackpot, for example, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with a “chicken” character, or a “girl” that does not normally appear A variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character is included.

  The change pattern at the time of the big hit is determined using only the change type counter CS1, but may be determined using another plurality of change type counters. For example, another variation type counter for fine-tuning the variation time by about ± several seconds may be provided, or a warning effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or a reach effect may be added before the start of the variation or during the variation effect. May be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7D, the variation pattern table 202d1 for deviation (normal) is dedicated to complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as a stop type at the time of deviation, and reach-rear-reach and front-rear-reach. Is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the type of stop at the time of departure, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. Is attached. If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area at the start of the fluctuation is not a value of a big hit (big hit random value), that is, a value of a loss, the gaming state excludes the time reduction state. When in the normal low probability state, the variation corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The pattern is determined from the outlier (normal) variation pattern.

  There are two types of fluctuation patterns dedicated to complete departure: fluctuation D in which fluctuation is completed in a short time of 7 seconds and reach is not established, and fluctuation E of 10 seconds in which the fluctuation time is longer than fluctuation D but reach is not established. The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is that the variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 149, and the variation E (10 seconds) is 150 to 198. In addition, the reach has the above-mentioned fluctuation A (30 seconds) and fluctuation B (60 seconds) as the fluctuation pattern, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 for the fluctuation A (30 seconds). 197, and the variation B (60 seconds) is 198.

  FIG. 7E is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7E, the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete departure is determined as the departure stop type, similarly to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. And a common reach that is referred to when a reach other than the front-rear reach and a reach other than the front-rear departure are determined as the stop type at the time of the detachment. Then, for each of the divided groups, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in each group. In addition, the variation patterns selected in the case of referring to the complete variation only are variation D (7 seconds) and variation E (10 seconds) as in the variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. Also, the variation pattern selected when the common reach is referred to is variation A (30 seconds) and variation B (60 seconds), similarly to the variation pattern table (normal) 202d1.

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probable change, execution is performed. In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is changed to a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2. Is determined from

  In the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is such that the variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 190, and the variation E (10 seconds) is 191 to 198. Has become. The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the common reach is that variation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 197 and variation B is 198.

  The out-of-place (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of the probable change, and thus the state in which the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. Become. Therefore, when the variation E having a relatively long variation time is frequently performed in the time reduction state or the high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next variation display, and the waiting state is given to the player. May cause player discomfort. In addition, the operation rate of a hole is undesirably reduced because of a decrease in operation rate. Therefore, in the case of the complete departure, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probable change, the fluctuation D having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation E is greater than when the gaming state is in the normal state excluding the time reduction state. By configuring so that it is easy to select and starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility of giving the player discomfort. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operation rate.

  Note that the variation pattern at the time of departure is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of notice, etc.). In addition, when the reach is established at the time of departure, another variation type counter determines how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to stop last is shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol deviated before and after deviating, etc.). May be determined by

  Further, the selection of the type of disconnection is configured to be divided into the variable pattern for normal (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the variable pattern for positive (variable) table 202d2. In the case of (for example, three or more in the case of a maximum of four), the fluctuation display may be ended early, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, A configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern table for normal or certain variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls is prepared.

  Furthermore, in the deviation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 7D and 7E, the fluctuations D and E are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , The fluctuation D and the fluctuation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 6 again, the various counters will be described. As described above, the second hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is added one by one in a range of 0 to 250 and reaches a maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the update is periodically performed from a certain initial value and returns to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Obtained when done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. Note that the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is performed once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19) is performed. It is updated and updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 25).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores a counter buffer 203b for storing various counters shown in FIG. 6 and a reserved ball storage area 203c, as well as contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 28), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 27). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further has at least a reserved ball number counter 203a. The reserved ball number counter 203a reserves a variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times. The reserve ball number counter 203a has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of reserve balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S1403 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the pending ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time a variable display based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 23).

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 25). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a ball is entered into the first entrance port 64 and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the reserved ball count counter 203a is incremented by one to obtain the value of the variable display reserved ball count itself retained in the main control device 110. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of variation display, which is managed by the sphere number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, deviates from the actual number of spheres of variation display suspended by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if it has, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number symbol in the reserved display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 has at least a detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a and a determination upper limit pointer 222b, and the RAM 223 includes a reserved ball number counter 223a, a detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b, a notice effect flag 223c, an notice effect counter 223d, a judgment rank counter 223e, 2 pointer 223f and a button operation flag 223g. Here, the reserved ball number counter 223a will be described first, and then the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b, the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a, and the announcement effect flag 223c will be described. Thereafter, a description effect counter 223d, a determination upper limit value pointer 222b, a determination rank counter 223e, a second pointer 223f, and a frame button operation flag 223g will be described in this order.

  The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) similarly to the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. This is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect which are reserved in the control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the value of the pending ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 by adding the number of pending balls of the variable effect by entering the first entrance port 64. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved The number of the reserved balls of the variable effect) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 32).

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and in accordance with the reception, the third symbol When the mode of the variable display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). As described above, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or stores the retained ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stored or updated reserved ball number counter 223a at the timing of updating the value of the stored ball number.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, it displays the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the reserved display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2751 in FIG. 46A). As described above, the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the pending counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a are counters for determining the fluctuation mode (detailed fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect to be started based on the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. And a table.

  In the present embodiment, as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the variation pattern command from main controller 110, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds. In addition to the normal reach, a plurality of normal reach that are displayed while a predetermined character is changing are prepared. The normal reach includes a fluctuation pattern in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times during one fluctuation effect.

  In addition, as a detailed pattern determined when the fluctuation B (the fluctuation time is 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, or the back image is rapidly changed and displayed. There are multiple super-reaches available. The super reach includes a fluctuation pattern in which a notice effect is performed more frequently during one fluctuation effect than in the normal reach.

  In addition, as a detailed variation pattern determined when the 2R variation (variation time is 31 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation big hit having a variation time of 31 seconds are prepared.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a include, when a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command are received from the main control device 110, a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command. It is used to determine one detailed variation pattern of a variation effect to be executed for the variation pattern command from the detailed variation patterns.

  The detailed variation pattern counter 223b is updated periodically (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1913 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30)). The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is configured by a loop counter, and the updating is performed by adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). This is done by: Also, an initial value “0” is set in a RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in a startup process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on.

  The detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a corresponds to each of the various fluctuation patterns prepared for each of the fluctuation patterns (variation A, fluctuation B, and 2R fluctuation) notified from the main controller 110. In addition, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is determined. Further, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b depends on whether the symbol confirmed and displayed in the fluctuation effect is “big hit” or “missing”, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A, fluctuation B, (2R fluctuations).

  When receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 reads the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. If it is determined that the variation type notified by the received stop type command is a jackpot, the value of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is used in the “big hit” of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a. When it is determined that the variation type notified by the received stop type command deviates from the variation type notified by the received variation pattern command, the value of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b read from the RAM 223 is used in the “departure” of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. Is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a.

  The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 on the basis of the determined detailed variation pattern, and sends the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform a variation effect based on the determined detailed variation pattern.

  When the fluctuation D (variation time: 7 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, one detailed fluctuation pattern is prepared in which the fluctuation completely deviates after a lapse of 7 seconds. I have. When the variation E (variation time of 10 seconds) is instructed, one variation pattern is prepared for details of the mode in which the variation E completely deviates after the variation time of 10 seconds elapses.

  Therefore, when variation D or variation E is instructed from main controller 110, MPU 221 determines a detailed variation pattern prepared for each, regardless of the value of detailed variation pattern counter 223a. Based on this, the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and a detailed variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command for display.

  The notice effect flag 223c is a flag indicating that the variable effect being executed is performed in a change pattern in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable effect. When the dry-run effect flag 223c is on, it indicates that the running fluctuation effect is being performed by the fluctuation pattern, and when it is off, it means that the running fluctuation effect is being performed by another fluctuation pattern. Show.

  The notice effect flag 223c is set when the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a triggered by the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110. Is set by the MPU 221 in accordance with the determined detailed variation pattern. In other words, when the determined detailed variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the variation effect, the notice effect flag 223c is set to ON, and the determined detailed variation pattern is changed to another variation. If it is a pattern, the notice effect flag 223c is set to off.

  When the notice effect flag 223c is set to ON, the MPU 221 performs control to execute the notice effect in the variable effect being executed. Details of the control will be described later.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13, a variation pattern prepared for variation A, a normal reach in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times, and a variation pattern prepared for variation B are shown. Next, a super reach in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times will be described.

  For the sake of simplicity, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that one normal reach and one super reach in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times are provided, and are referred to as a normal reach A and a super reach A, respectively. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is applicable even when a plurality of such normal reach and special reach are prepared.

  First, FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing a time course of a variable effect performed by Super Reach A. In the timing chart of FIG. 8, the number of seconds described in parentheses indicates the elapsed time when the start of the change is 0 second.

  In the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, when the fluctuation is started, first, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 are accelerated from a stopped (stopped) state to a state of scrolling at high speed. In the third symbol display device 81, a high-speed fluctuation in which all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll at a high speed invisible to the player for a predetermined second is displayed. Then, 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are sequentially stopped to establish a reach, and the normal symbol row Z2 is scrolled at a medium speed or a low speed at which the player can visually recognize the middle symbol row Z2 for 20 seconds. The fluctuation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A, the same high-speed fluctuation (10 seconds) and the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) as in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A are performed. Then, after 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the third symbol is stopped (fixed display).

  On the other hand, in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, after displaying the normal reach fluctuation for 20 seconds (30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), an image for notifying the player of the development to the super reach fluctuation (developed image) ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for 10 seconds.

  As described above, the fluctuation effect with the same contents is performed between the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A until the normal reach fluctuation ends. As a result, the player cannot know whether it is due to normal reach A or super reach A. As described above, when the variable effect is performed by the super reach, the degree of expectation that a large hit is obtained as a result of the variable effect is higher than in the case of the normal reach. Therefore, as the end of the normal reach change approaches, the player can decide whether the final display of the third symbol is performed as it is and the change effect ends as the normal reach, or the developed image is displayed and the change to the super reach change is performed. Watching the variable production while expecting whether the variable production ends as a reach. Therefore, even in the case where the fluctuation effect is performed by the normal reach having a low expectation to be a big hit, the fluctuation effect can be focused on to the end without getting the player bored.

  In the developed image displayed in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, the back image displayed in the effect display area Db is changed from the one that has been displayed so far, so that the player can be informed that the super reach has been developed. Notifying.

  Further, in the developed image in this super reach A, the variable display of the third symbol displayed in the variable display area Dm is moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 10) to be displayed smaller. . The fluctuation display of the third symbol is performed in a small display state immediately before the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed. Thereby, in the following super reach fluctuation, various characters and character information can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being affected by the fluctuation display of the third symbol, so that an elaborate effect in the super reach fluctuation is performed. In this case, the player can pay attention to the effect. Therefore, the player's interest can be enhanced by an elaborate effect that draws the player's attention.

  After displaying the developed image for 10 seconds, that is, 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, the super reach fluctuation is performed for 20 seconds. In the super reach variation in the super reach A, the character and character information are displayed in the variable display area Db while the reach display of the third symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that a big hit is expected. By increasing the degree, the interest of the player in the game is raised. Then, 60 seconds after the start of the change, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and the third symbol is fixedly displayed while all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed again in the variable display area Dm shown in FIG. In the final display of the third symbol, when the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1 (see FIG. 4), the jackpot is won. In addition, when the combination of the big hit symbols is not aligned on the activated line L1, the result is lost.

  By the way, in the variable production by the super reach A and the variable production by the normal reach A, as described above, the preview production is performed at various timings, and in some of the preliminary productions, there is no operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. It is performed when it is done. Next, a description will be given of a noticeable effect performed in the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A.

  In the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A, as shown in FIG. 8, first, a comment display 151 is performed as a notice effect during a high-speed change. This comment display 151 is displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81, triggered by the player's instruction to operate the frame button 22 (that is, the frame button being turned ON).

  The announcement effect by the comment display 151 is displayed according to the following procedure. First, when the high-speed fluctuation is started in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A, the boy 161 (see FIG. 9A) displays the effect on the third symbol display device 81 two seconds after the start. It is displayed in the area Db. When the boy 161 is displayed, a frame button operation reception period for receiving an operation of the frame button 22 is started, and an image (not shown) for prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed together with the boy 161 in the effect display area Db. . The frame button operation reception period is continued for a maximum of 5 seconds, and an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously displayed in the effect display area Db while the frame button operation reception period is continued.

  Then, if the frame button 22 is not operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period of 5 seconds, the boy 161 disappears from the screen of the third symbol display device 81, without performing the notice effect by the comment display 151, Continue to fluctuate. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation reception period, the frame button operation reception period ends at that point, and a notice effect is provided by the comment display 151.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, details of the announcement effect by the comment display 151 will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a notice effect by the comment display 151.

  In the notice effect by the comment display 151, a balloon 162 is displayed in the effect display region Db from the image of the boy 161 previously displayed in the effect display region Db, and the "small jackpot ...?" , "Let's reach!"

  It should be noted that at the time when the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed, the variable display of the third symbol is performed so as to cover the effect display area Db, but the variable display of the third symbol at this time is a game. This is a high-speed change that cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the image displayed in the effect display area Db is sufficiently visible to the player.

  In the comment display 151, the character information displayed in the balloon 161 can give a sense of expectation that the player may hit the player. However, the character information is configured to be randomly selected when an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is received. That is, the character information itself of the balloon 161 does not indicate the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but is intended to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, a frame (frame) 163 is provided around the balloon 162, and the display color of the frame 163 indicates the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation of winning is described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a mode in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot is shown in each announcement effect. Note that FIG. 13 also shows the determination upper limit pointer 222b, but the determination upper limit pointer 222b will be described later.

  In FIG. 13, ranks indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit are indicated by "1" to "5". The rank “1” is the rank with the lowest expected jackpot, and the rank “2” is the rank with the second lowest expected jackpot. Then, as the ranks increase to "3" and "4", the expectation of the jackpot increases, and the rank "5" is the rank where the expectation of the jackpot is 100%, that is, the jackpot always becomes the jackpot.

  Each announcement effect executed in the variable effect by the Super Reach A and the variable effect by the Normal Reach A has five patterns, and different ranks are associated with the respective patterns. In each of the preview productions, by performing the production in accordance with one of the five patterns selected from the contents of the production performed in the preliminary production, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is given to the player in five ranks. Can be shown. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation degree in each rank is set to be the same regardless of the notice effect. That is, when the expectation of the same rank is shown in one notice effect and another notice effect, the expectation shown in each notice effect is the same.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the preview effect by the comment display 151, when the display color of the frame 163 of the balloon 162 is white, the rank “1” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is blue, the rank “2” is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is red, the rank “3” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is a tiger pattern, rank “4” is shown as the expected degree. When the display color of the frame 163 is rainbow (rainbow), the rank “5” (that is, 100% big hit) is shown as the expectation.

  What to do with the display color of the frame 163 of the balloon 162 depends on the result of the fluctuating effect in which the notice effect is performed (whether a jackpot or a miss) and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuating effect (normal reach A or super reach A). ) Is randomly determined when it is received that the frame button 22 has been operated by the player. The determination method will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the announcement effect is continued. In the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A, a notice effect is performed even during the normal reach change. Specifically, a notice effect is given by a child character appearance 152 in which a child character appears during normal reach fluctuation. The notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is automatically displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 irrespective of the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9B, details of the announcement effect due to the appearance 152 of the child character will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the notice effect by the appearance 152 of the child character.

  In the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, 5 seconds after the start of the normal reach change (15 seconds after the start of the change), the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 8 is automatically and substantially at the center, that is, The child 164 is displayed behind the middle symbol row Z2. Then, while the normal reach fluctuation is being performed, the child 164 is moved in accordance with the movement of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 scrolled at a medium speed or a low speed that is visually recognizable to the player, and as if the child 164 were in the middle symbol. This is shown to the player as if scrolling in column Z2. This allows the player to watch the movement of the child 164 while watching the movement of the child 164 and expecting the fixed display to be displayed in a jackpot pattern. People can be concentrated.

  Here, in the notice effect by the appearance 152 of the child character, the color of the clothes 164a worn by the child 164 indicates the degree of expectation to be a big hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the color of the clothes 164a and the degree of expectation to be a big hit will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the notice effect by the appearance 152 of the child character, when the color of the clothes 164 a worn by the child 164 is white, the rank “1” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is blue, rank “2” is shown as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is red, the rank “3” is shown as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is a tiger pattern, the rank “4” is shown as the degree of expectation. Then, when the color of the clothes 164a is rainbow (rainbow), the rank “5” (that is, 100% jackpot) is shown as the degree of expectation. As described above, the relationship between the color of the clothes 164a and the degree of expectation is the same as the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation in the notice effect by the comment display 151.

  What to do with the color of the clothes 164a of the child 164 depends on the result of the fluctuating effect in which the notice effect is performed (whether a jackpot or a miss) and the fluctuating pattern of the fluctuating effect (normal reach A or super reach A). Are determined randomly at the time of performing a notice effect by the appearance 152 of the child character. The determination method will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the announcement effect is continued. In the fluctuating effect by Super Reach A, a notice effect is performed even while the developed image is being displayed. Specifically, a preview effect is performed by the super reach selection 153 for selecting the type of super reach while displaying the developed image. In this super reach selection 153, the type of super reach variation (reach type) displayed following the developed image is selected from among five reach types according to the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22. Yes, depending on the reach species selected, shows the expected degree of jackpot.

  Here, the details of the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a notice effect by the super reach selection 153. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10, in the advanced image in which the preview effect is performed by the super reach selection 153, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is displayed so as to be large enough to fill the effect display area Db.

  The notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is started two seconds after the developed image is displayed, that is, 32 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the image shown in FIG. 10 is displayed. In this image, a treasure box 165 is displayed at the center of the effect display area Db, and character information of "Destroy the treasure box!" Is displayed at the top. This notifies the player that an effect that will be a big hit if the treasure chest can be destroyed will be performed during the super reach change. In addition, a boy 166 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area Db, a balloon is displayed from the boy 166, and character information such as "Please decide the destroyer! Press the button!" Is displayed in the balloon. In addition, an image of the child 167, an image of the male 168, an image of the witch 169, and an image of the Raijin 170 are displayed on the right side of the effect display area Db as possible vandals. Then, one of the images of the child 167, the male 168, the witch 169, and the thunder god 170 is highlighted (in FIG. 10, the child 167 is highlighted), and the highlighted images are sequentially replaced at high speed. . This allows the player to recognize that the destroyer is selected by operating the frame button operation 22.

  In the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153, the reach type of the super reach variation performed thereafter is associated with each of the destroyers selected here. In other words, the child 167 is associated with “one-shot reach” that displays an effect in which the child 167 hits the treasure chest and destroys it during the super reach change, and for the male 168, A “hit-and-reach” that displays an effect in which the male 168 tries to destroy the treasure chest by repeatedly hitting the treasure chest during the super-reach change is associated. For the witch 169, the witch 169 casts a magic on the treasure chest during the super-reach change. A “magic reach” to be destroyed by the lightning is associated with the lightning god 170, and a “lightning reach” by the lightning god 170 to drop the lightning into the treasure chest during the super reach change is associated with the lightning god 170. Further, although not displayed on the preview effect screen by the super reach selection 153, as the reach type selected here, the Buddha 172 (see FIG. 11B) further recites the sutra and opens the treasure chest. Buddha Reach. "

  As described above, these reach types represent the degree of expectation that will be a big hit after the fluctuation effect. Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the reach type selected by the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153 and the expectation of winning a jackpot will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the reach type selected by the notice production by the super reach selection 153 is “one-shot reach”, the rank is “1” as the expectation degree, and when the “reach reach”, the rank is “1”. If the rank is "2", if it is "magic reach", it shows rank "3" as the expected degree, if it is "lightning reach", it shows rank "4" as the expected degree, and if it is "French reach" For example, rank “5” is shown as the degree of expectation. That is, the “Buddha-like reach” is a reach species that has a 100% expectation of a jackpot. Although the image of the Buddha 172 is not displayed in the notice production by the super reach selection 153, the undisplayed Buddha 172 is displayed at the start of the super reach, and the super reach is changed by using the Buddha 172 as a motif. Thus, it is possible to strongly impress the player that the game has developed into a special reach, that is, a so-called premium reach in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is 100%. Thereby, the interest of the player in the game can be greatly enhanced.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153 will be continued. In the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10, the reach type of the super reach variation is set to the above-mentioned “one-shot reach” and “continuous hit” based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153. Reach, "Magic Reach," "Thunder Reach," and "Buddha Reach." Then, the player is notified of the selection result by displaying a character image corresponding to the selected reach type in a notice effect by a character appearance 154 described later performed at the start of the super reach change. This allows the player to appear as if the destroyer who destroys the treasure chest is selected based on the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated during the notice effect by the super reach selection 153.

  At the time of the notice production by the super reach selection 153, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is made when the notice production by the super reach selection 153 is started (that is, the image shown in FIG. 10 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81). (Displayed)) during the frame button operation acceptance period. The frame button operation reception period is continued for a maximum of 5 seconds, and the image of FIG. 10 is continuously displayed in the effect display area Db while the frame button operation reception period is continuing.

  Then, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation reception period, the frame button operation reception period is terminated at that point, and the reach type is set to “one-shot reach”, “continuous hit reach”, Select from "Magical Reach", "Thunder Reach", and "Buddha Reach". On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not operated by the player during the frame button operation reception period of 5 seconds, the frame button operation reception period is terminated as it is, and at that time, the reach type is set to “One-shot reach”, “ Choose from "reach hits", "magic reach", "thunder reach", and "buddha reach".

  Which reach type is to be selected is based on the result of the variable production in which the notice production is performed (whether a jackpot or a loss) and the fluctuation pattern of the variable production (normal reach A or super reach A). Then, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is received, or when the frame button operation receiving period ends without operating the frame button 22, the determination is randomly made. The determination method will be described later.

  In the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153, the image of the destroyer corresponding to the selected reach type is not immediately displayed as described above, but is displayed by the announcement effect by the character appearance 154 performed at the start of the super reach change as described above. I do. During the period from the end of the frame button operation acceptance period until the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is performed, the content of the speech balloon of the boy 166 shown in FIG. 10 is changed to character information of "Who is the destroyer?" Subsequently, the highlight display performed for the child 167, the male 168, the witch 169, and the Raijin 170 is performed. Thus, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 can be noticed while giving the player an expectation of which destroyer has been selected until the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is displayed.

  Next, a description will be given of a notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed in the variable effect by the super reach A. The notice effect by the character appearance 154 is a notice effect performed at the same time as the super reach change starts (developing to super reach), and is a change of the super reach change selected in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 performed earlier. The reach type is notified to the player by displaying an image of the character associated with the reach type in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the announcement production by the character appearance 154 is not determined by the rank indicating the jackpot expectation degree at the time of the announcement production and the announcement production is performed in a pattern according to the rank, but is selected by the super reach selection 153 at the announcement selection. The announcement production is performed according to the specified reach species. The notice effect by the character appearance 154 is automatically performed when the super reach change is started.

  Here, referring again to FIG. 13, the character displayed in the effect display area Db by the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the reach type selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, and the expectation degree to be a big hit The relationship will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the “reach one-shot” having the rank of the expectation degree “1” is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the child character is associated with the notice effect by the character appearance 154. At the start of the super-reach change, a child image is displayed in the effect display area Db. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize that the super reach change due to the "hit reach" is started, and it is also possible to grasp that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is the lowest rank "1".

  When the “repeated reach” with the rank of the expectation of “2” has been selected by the notice production by the super reach selection 153, the male character is associated with the notice production by the character appearance 154, and the super reach variation At the start, a male image is displayed in the effect display area Db. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the “repeated hit reach” starts, and to grasp that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is the second lowest rank “2”.

  If “magic reach” having an expectation rank of “3” has been selected by the notice production by the super reach selection 153, the witch character is associated with the notice production by the character appearance 154, and the super reach change At the start, an image of the witch is displayed in the effect display area Db. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the super reach change due to the “magic reach” starts, and also to grasp that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is the third highest rank “3”.

  If the “thunder reach” with the expectation rank of “4” has been selected by the notice production by the super reach selection 153, the character of thunder god is associated with the notice production by the character appearance 154, and the super reach change At the start, an image of Raijin is displayed in the effect display area Db. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the super reach change due to the “lightning reach” starts, and also to grasp that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is the second highest rank “4”.

  If the “reach of Buddha” having an expectation rank of “5” has been selected by the notice production by the super reach selection 153, the character of Buddha is associated with the notice production by the character appearance 154, and the super reach At the start of the change, an image of a Buddha is displayed in the effect display area Db. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize that the super reach change due to the “reach of Buddha” starts, and it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation to be a big hit is rank “5”, which is 100%.

  When a predetermined character is displayed in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character is given a unique color. For example, for a child corresponding to “hit one-shot reach” with an expectation rank of “1”, the child's clothes are displayed in “white”, and a “continuous hit reach” with an expectation rank of “2” is displayed. For men who correspond to, the men's clothes are displayed in "blue", and for witches that correspond to "magic reach" with an expected rank of "3", the witch's clothes are displayed in "red" For the thunder god corresponding to the “thunder reach” with the expectation rank of “4”, the cloth worn by the thunder god is displayed as a “tiger pattern”, and the “buddha sama” with the expectation rank of “5” is displayed. For the Buddha corresponding to "reach", the halo pointing to the Buddha is displayed by "rainbow".

  That is, the relationship between the color displayed in accordance with the character and the degree of expectation is determined by the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation in the notice effect produced by the comment display 151, and the color of the clothes 164 a in the notice effect produced by the child character appearance 152. And the degree of expectation. Therefore, just by looking at the colors displayed in each preview production, it is possible to grasp the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable production in which the preliminary production is being performed, and convey the degree of expectation to the player in an easy-to-understand manner be able to. Therefore, a friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a notice effect by a character appearance 154, and FIG. (B) shows an example in which an image of Buddha 172 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, also in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 10). As a result, the notice effect produced by the character appearance 154 can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being affected by the variable display of the third symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the effect, and It can enhance interest.

  Also, in the announcement effect by the character appearance 154, character information "Destroyer ..." is displayed at the top of the effect display area Db, and a treasure box 165 is displayed on the left part of the effect display area Db. In the right part of the display area Db, an image of the character corresponding to the reach type selected by the announcement effect by the super reach selection 153 is displayed.

  For example, when the reach type selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is “repeated reach”, as shown in FIG. 11A, the image of the male 171 corresponding to the continuous reach is displayed in the effect display area Db. Display on the right. Thereby, the player can be made to understand that a reach effect is performed in which a man tries to destroy the treasure chest by repeatedly hitting the treasure chest, and the degree of expectation that the jackpot is expected from the reach type that the player has grasped is ranked “2”. Can be notified to the player. At this time, since the clothes of the clothes 171a worn by the men 171 are displayed in "blue", even if the player has difficulty understanding the relationship between the reach type and the jackpot expectation, the expectation at which the jackpot is achieved from this color is ranked. It can be easily understood that it is “2”.

  In the super reach change, the effect in which the male 171 repeatedly hits the treasure box 165 is displayed in the effect display area Db. In the case of a big hit, the treasure box 165 is destroyed by the male 171 and the right symbol column Z1 and the left symbol column Z2 are displayed. A third symbol ("7" in the example of FIG. 11A) that is the same as the third symbol being stopped and displayed jumps out of the treasure chest 165 and is stopped and displayed as the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, in the case of a departure, the male 171 cannot destroy the treasure chest 165, and a third symbol other than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the right symbol column Z1 and the left symbol column Z2 stops in the middle symbol column Z2. The effect to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, when the reach type selected by the notice production by the super reach selection 153 is “Buddha reach”, an image of the Buddha 172 corresponding to the Buddha reach is rendered and displayed as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the right part of the area Db. As a result, the player can be informed that the reach effect of opening the treasure box by the Buddha chanting the sutra will be performed, and the degree of expectation that the player will reach the jackpot from the reach type that the player has grasped is ranked “5”. , That is, 100% jackpot. Also, at this time, the halo 172a of the Buddha 172 is displayed in “rainbow”, so that even for a player who has difficulty understanding the relationship between the reach species and the jackpot expectation, the expectation that the jackpot from the color becomes the rank “ 5 "can be easily understood. In addition, by displaying the image of the Buddha 172 not displayed in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, as described above, the player has a special reach, that is, expectation of the jackpot. It can be strongly impressed that the system has developed into a so-called premium reach with a degree of 100%. Thereby, the interest of the player in the game can be greatly enhanced.

  In the super reach fluctuation, after that, the effect of the Buddha 172 chanting the sutra is displayed in the effect display area Db, and finally the treasure box 165 is opened, and the third symbol stopped and displayed in the right symbol column Z1 and the left symbol column Z2. The third symbol display (3 in the example of FIG. 11A) which is the same as the symbol jumps out of the treasure chest 165 and is stopped and displayed as the third symbol in the middle symbol column Z2. It is displayed on the device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the announcement effect is continued. In the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, the cut-in 155 is further performed as a notice effect during the fluctuation of the super reach. The cut-in 155 is displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81, triggered by an instruction from the player to operate the frame button 22 (that is, the frame button being turned ON).

  The announcement effect by the cut-in 155 is displayed according to the following procedure. First, 5 seconds after the start of the super-reach change (45 seconds after the start of the change), a frame button operation reception period for receiving the operation of the frame button 22 starts, and an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 in the effect display area Db. (Not shown) is displayed. The frame button operation accepting period is continued for 10 seconds, and an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed in the effect display area, except during a period in which the frame button operation accepting period is continued and a later-described cut-in image is displayed. It continues to be displayed on Db.

  Then, if the frame button 22 is not operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period of 10 seconds, the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is deleted from the effect display area Db, and the preview effect by the cut-in 155 is not performed. Continue to fluctuate. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation reception period, a cut-in image described later is displayed in the effect display area Db for one second at that time. In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation of the frame button 22 can be received many times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation of the frame button 22 is received. .

  Here, the details of the notice effect by the cut-in 155 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a cut-in image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a notice effect by the cut-in 155.

  As shown in FIG. 12, also in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 10). As a result, the notice effect by the cut-in 155 can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being affected by the variable display of the third symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the effect, and It can enhance interest.

  In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the right eye 173 of the character displayed in the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is zoomed up and displayed in the notice effect region Db, and the cut-in frame 174 is produced so as to surround the zoomed right eye. It is displayed in the display area Db. In the announcement effect by the cut-in 155, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 indicates the degree of expectation of winning a big hit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the display color of the cut-in frame 174 and the degree of expectation of winning big will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, when the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is white, the rank “1” is indicated as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is blue, rank “2” is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is red, the rank “3” is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is a tiger pattern, rank “4” is shown as the degree of expectation. Then, when the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is rainbow (rainbow), rank “5” (that is, 100% big hit) is indicated as the degree of expectation.

  As described above, the relationship between the display color of the cut-in frame 174 and the degree of expectation to be a big hit is determined by the relation between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation in the comment display 151 and the clothing in the notice production by the child character appearance 152. This is the same as the relationship between the color of 164a and the degree of expectation, and the relationship between the color displayed together with the character in the notice effect by the character appearance 154 and the degree of expectation. Therefore, just by looking at the colors displayed in each preview production, it is possible to grasp the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable production in which the preliminary production is being performed, and convey the degree of expectation to the player in an easy-to-understand manner be able to. Therefore, a friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined once each time an operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received from the player, and a cut-in image including the cut-in frame 174 displayed in the determined display color is produced and displayed. It is displayed in the area Db. That is, each time the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is performed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 of the cut-in image displayed according to the operation is determined. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 many times while expecting the player to expect a higher jackpot expectation. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game even while the variable effect is being performed, and the interest in the game can be increased.

  Note that the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined by the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed (whether a jackpot or a loss) and the change pattern of the variable effect (normal reach A or super reach). A) is randomly determined at each timing when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received. The determination method will be described later.

  As described above, the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A are configured to perform the notice effect a plurality of times during the variable effect. Further, in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A having a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach A, more notice effects are performed. If the fluctuating time of the fluctuating effect is long, the player may get bored until the stop display is performed. Expectation can be given. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game and to continue the game.

  Also, each announcement effect has five patterns, and each pattern is associated with a different degree of expectation. In the notice effect by the comment display 151 and the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is determined when the player receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22 in the notice effect by the comment display 151. At the time when the notice effect is started, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, at the time when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received by the player or at the time of the frame button operation reception period for receiving the operation instruction of the frame button 22 At the end, it is determined randomly.

  Here, the reason for not separately determining the pattern of each announcement effect but determining each separately is as follows. That is, when the patterns are determined collectively, it is necessary to previously store the combination of the patterns set for each of the announcement effects in the ROM 222. By storing a large number of combinations of patterns to be set for each announcement effect in the ROM 222, a plurality of announcement effects can be executed during one variable effect with a wider variety of pattern combinations. However, if an attempt is made to store too many combinations of patterns in the ROM 222, a large storage capacity is required, and a large-capacity ROM 222 is required. On the other hand, if a pattern is determined separately for each announcement effect, a plurality of announcements can be made during one fluctuation effect with various combinations of patterns without storing the combination of patterns set for the announcement effect in the ROM 222. An effect can be performed.

  In addition, in each of the announcement effects by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which of the five patterns is to be determined at random. There are also the following reasons. If the announcement effect pattern is determined in advance before the frame button operation acceptance period, the expected degree of the jackpot indicated by the announcement effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, since the player does not feel much importance in the timing of operating the frame button 22, there is a possibility that the player may inadvertently operate the frame button 22. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which of the five patterns is to be determined at random is determined. The pattern to be selected changes, and the player can be given an impression that the degree of expectation to be a big hit indicated by the notice effect changes at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. Thereby, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the frame button 22 while considering the timing of operating the frame button 22.

  In addition, in the preview effect by the comment display 151 and the cut-in 155, unless the frame button 22 is operated during the frame button operation acceptance period, the player is not notified of the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, even if the pattern is determined at the stage where the frame button 22 is not operated in the preview display by the comment display 151 and the cut-in 155 in which the expectation degree of the jackpot may not be notified, the determination may be useless. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which of the five patterns is to be determined at random is determined. Only when the pattern is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the useless processing from being performed.

  By the way, for a plurality of preview productions to be executed during one variable production, the pattern of each preview production is not determined collectively in advance, but when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received by the player, If the pattern of each preview effect is determined separately, such as when the preview effect is started, the following problem occurs.

  In other words, if the pattern of each announcement production is determined separately, the expected degree of jackpot of a high rank is shown in one announcement production, and then the lower rank of another announcement production in the same fluctuation production is shown. There may be a case where the jackpot expectation degree is indicated. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  Further, in the preview effect in which an image indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when a lower expectation degree than the expectation value of the jackpot indicated in the previous notice effect is indicated, The user may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched is shown. In this case, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may decrease the willingness to participate in the game.

  In order to solve such a problem, the present pachinko machine 10 sets the jackpot of the first rank in a notice effect during a variable effect, and displays the next notice effect (the subsequent notice effect). When the pattern of the announcement effect is determined, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation of a big hit than the one rank is not selected. Also, in the pachinko machine 10, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation instruction is received, and the cut-in image is displayed. Each time the image is displayed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined, and the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player. Is displayed, in the subsequent cut-in image, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation than the one rank is not selected.

  Thereby, after the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain noticed production during the variable production, in the subsequent noticeable production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank, or the pattern corresponding to the one rank, Also, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is shown high, so that the player is less interested. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the expectation of the jackpot is maintained or increased over a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of the jackpot will increase, In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting a so-called upswing. In addition, for a notice effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed by operating the frame button 22, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  Hereinafter, returning to FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a degree of expectation to be a big hit of one rank is indicated in a certain notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect (the subsequent notice effect) In the following, a description will be given of a specific configuration in which a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation that is a big hit than the one rank is not selected when the pattern of the announcement effect is determined.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 has the announcement effect counter 223d, the judgment rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the frame button operation flag 223g in the RAM 223, and has the judgment upper limit pointer 222b in the ROM 222. .

  The notice effect counter 223d is a counter for determining one pattern to be performed in the notice effect from among five patterns prepared for the notice effect when performing the notice effect during the variable effect. . The notice effect counter 223d is updated periodically (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1913 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30)). The notice effect counter 223d is configured by a loop counter, and the update is performed by adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Done by Also, an initial value “0” is set in a RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in a startup process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on.

  As described above, the determination of which of the five patterns to perform the preview effect is performed by the player in the preview effect by the comment display 151 and the preview effect by the cut-in 155, as described above. At the time, in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, when the notice effect is started, in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received by the player or when the This is performed at the end of the frame button operation reception period for receiving an operation instruction. The notice effect counter 223d is referred to by the MPU 221 at the timing of determining the pattern for performing the notice effect for each notice effect, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that timing and the result of the variable effect at which the notice effect is performed (whether a big hit is achieved). , And the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b determined from the variation pattern of the variation effect (normal reach A or super reach A).

  In addition, since the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is an effect performed automatically, the pattern should be determined by the time the notice effect is executed. It seems that the pattern of the notice production may be determined. However, in the present embodiment, when the pattern of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is determined, the rank with a lower degree of expectation to be a big hit than the pattern selected in the notice effect by the comment display 151 performed earlier is determined. The corresponding pattern must be unselected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the pattern of the notice effect is determined at the time of starting the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 after the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed. However, if the pattern of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is determined after the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed and before the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is started, the timing of the determination is arbitrary. It may be.

  Here, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned a first predetermined number value from “0” to the rank with the highest expectation of a jackpot, and a second predetermined number value from the next value is a big jackpot. Expectation is assigned to the second highest rank. Then, the value “99” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest degree of expectation of winning.

  The determination upper limit pointer 222b determines the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern when selecting one of the five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of the notice effect counter 223d. Is a pointer that gives the upper limit of the determination for.

  When deciding the pattern of the notice effect, the MPU 221 sequentially determines the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b given to the pattern and the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that time in order from the pattern corresponding to the rank of the jackpot with a high expectation. Compare with value. When the value of the notice effect counter 223d becomes equal to or smaller than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the pattern of a certain rank, the pattern of the rank is selected as the pattern of the notice effect.

  For example, if the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is “9” for the pattern corresponding to the rank “5” having the highest expected degree of jackpot, the upper limit of the determination of the pattern corresponding to the rank “5” is If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 9 or less as "9", the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" is selected as the notice effect pattern. On the other hand, when the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 10 or more, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” having the next highest expectation to be a big hit is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d. I do.

  Here, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is “49” for the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” with the expectation degree of the jackpot, the upper limit of the determination of the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” is set to “4”. When the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 49 or less, the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” is selected as the notice effect pattern. When the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 9 or less, since the pattern corresponding to the rank “5” has already been selected as the notice effect pattern, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is actually 10 or more to 49. In the following cases, the pattern corresponding to the rank “4” is selected as the announcement effect pattern.

  On the other hand, when the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 50 or more, the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit thereafter becomes “3”, “2”, “1” in the order of the determination upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to the rank. Is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d, and when the value of the notice effect counter 223d becomes equal to or less than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the pattern of a certain rank, the pattern of that rank is determined. Select as a notice production pattern.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d given to each of the five patterns prepared for each announcement effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in each of the notice effects of the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d given to each pattern is Is the same. As a result, in any of the announcement effects, the degree of expectation of the jackpot indicated by each pattern becomes the same. In this way, by setting the expectation degree of the jackpot indicated by each pattern to be the same in any of the notice effects, each notice effect performed during one variable effect has the same rank of the expectation degree of the jackpot. When performed in a pattern, it is possible to impress on the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot has not changed in each preview production, and one preview production performed during one fluctuation production is When the rank of the degree of expectation that is a bigger hit than the previous announcement performance is performed in the upper pattern, it is possible to impress on the player that the degree of expectation that the big hit is increased is increased.

  On the other hand, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d given to each pattern is determined by the determination upper limit pointer 223d. (Normal reach A or super reach A).

  If the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “big hit”, regardless of the change pattern of the variable effect, the judgment is made for the pattern in which the degree of expectation to become a jackpot indicates rank “5” in each notice effect. "9" is given as the upper limit value pointer 223d, and "49" is given as the determination upper limit value pointer 223d for the pattern in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot indicates the rank "4", and the degree of expectation of the big hit is the rank "3". For the pattern shown, “69” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d, and “49” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern showing the jackpot expectation degree of “4”. Gives “99” as the determination upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern indicating the rank “1”.

  When the result of the variable production in which the preview production is performed is “out of place” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable production is “Super Reach A”, the expectation degree of the big hit in each of the preview productions is rank “4”. For the pattern, “19” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d, and for the pattern having the jackpot expectation degree of rank “3”, “29” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d. For the pattern indicating rank “2”, “49” is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d, and for the pattern showing the rank of “1” with the expected degree of jackpot, “99” is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d. However, in this case, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d is not given to a pattern whose expected degree of winning is the rank "5", and the pattern of the rank "5" is not selected. .

  In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out of place” and the change pattern of the variable effect is “normal reach A”, the expectation degree of the big hit in each notice effect is ranked “3”. "1" is given as a determination upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern shown, and "9" is given as a determination upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern showing the rank "2" as the jackpot expectation. Gives “99” as the determination upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern indicating the rank “1”. However, in this case, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 223d is not given to the pattern in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot indicates the rank “5” or “4”, and the pattern of the rank “5” or “4” is not given. Is not selected.

  As described above, by giving the value of the determination upper limit pointer 223d to each pattern of the notice effect, if the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "big hit", the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 0 to 9. If it is within the range, the pattern of rank “5” is selected as the pattern of the announcement effect, and if the value of the announcement effect counter 223d is in the range of 10 to 49, the pattern of rank “4” is selected as the pattern of the effect effect. If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 50 to 69, the pattern of rank "3" is selected as the notice effect pattern. If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 70 to 84, the rank " If the pattern of "2" is selected as the pattern of the notice effect, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 85 to 99, the rank "1" is selected. Turn the monkey selected as the pattern of the announcement attraction.

  In addition, if the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out” and the change pattern of the change effect is “super reach A”, if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 0 to 19, If the pattern of rank "4" is selected as a notice effect pattern and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 20 to 29, the pattern of rank "3" is selected as the notice effect pattern and the notice effect counter 223d. Is in the range of 30 to 49, the pattern of rank “2” is selected as the announcement effect pattern. If the value of the announcement effect counter 223d is in the range of 50 to 99, the pattern of rank “1” is selected. It is selected as a notice production pattern.

  When the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out of place” and the change pattern of the variable effect is “normal reach A”, if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is 0 or 1, the rank “3” Is selected as a notice effect pattern, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 2 to 9, the pattern of rank “2” is selected as the notice effect pattern, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is If it is in the range of 10 to 99, the pattern of rank “1” is selected as the pattern for the announcement effect.

  As a result, the lower the rank of the pattern, the easier it is to select when the result of the fluctuating effect in which the notice effect is performed is "out", and the higher the rank of the pattern, the more the result of the fluctuating effect in which the notice effect is performed is "big hit" "Is easier to select. In particular, the pattern of rank “5” is selected only when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “big hit”. Therefore, the lower the rank of the pattern, the lower the expectation of the jackpot, and the higher the rank of the pattern, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. Then, for the pattern of rank “5”, the degree of expectation of winning is 100%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 223d is given to each pattern of the notice effect, when the result of the change effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out”, the change of the change effect is changed. If the pattern is “Super Reach A”, a higher-ranked pattern, that is, a pattern with a high expectation of a big hit is easily selected as a pattern of the announcement effect, and further, a level of a high expectation of a big hit The pattern “4” is selected only when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “Super Reach A”.

  Thereby, in the notice effect by the comment display 151 or the notice effect by the appearance of the child character 152 performed at the stage of the high-speed change or the normal reach change, when the notice effect is performed at the rank “4”, the player develops into super reach. Can be convinced, and even if the notice effect is not performed at the rank "4", if the notice effect is performed in a higher-ranked pattern, the player can increase the expectation of developing to the super reach. Therefore, as for the notice effect by the comment display 151 or the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 performed after the start of the change effect, not only the expectation to the big hit but also the expectation to the super reach can be expressed. A notice effect performed early on after the effect is started can also interest the player.

  The judgment rank counter 223e is a counter used in a process of determining a notice effect pattern. When determining a notice effect pattern, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b for comparing with the value of the notice effect counter 223d is a big hit. Since the pattern having the highest expectation rank is given in descending order, the rank of the pattern giving the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is counted in order from the higher rank.

  The judgment rank counter 223e is set to an initial value at the start of the notice effect rank determining process (FIG. 36), which is the process of determining the notice effect pattern (S2140). The initial value is the rank with the highest expectation among the ranks of the expectation to be the big hit in which the comparison between the determination upper limit pointer 222b and the notice effect counter 223d is performed in the determination.

  For example, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “big hit”, the comparison between the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the notice effect counter 223d is performed based on the pattern corresponding to the rank “5” of the expectation degree of the big hit. Therefore, "5" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e. If the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "out of range" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable effect is "super reach A", the judgment is made based on the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" of the degree of expectation to be a big hit. Since the upper limit pointer 222b is compared with the notice effect counter 223d, "4" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e. If the result of the variable production in which the notice production is performed is "out of range" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable production is "normal reach A", the judgment upper limit is determined from the pattern corresponding to the rank "3" of the degree of expectation to be a big hit. Since the value pointer 222b is compared with the notice effect counter 223d, "3" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e.

  In the notice effect rank determination process, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (see FIG. 13) is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d (S2141 in FIG. 36). S2142). If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is not less than or equal to the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, that is, if the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is larger than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is decremented by 1, and the subtraction is performed again. The value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b (see FIG. 13) of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determined determination rank counter 223e is compared with the value of the notice effect counter 223d.

  On the other hand, when the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at that time is determined as the notice effect pattern. When the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e, that is, information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the determined pattern, and the type of the notice effect that determined the pattern of the notice effect (comment display 151, A notification effect command including information indicating any one of child character appearance 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, and cut-in 155) is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, during the variable effect being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the notice effect of the type indicated by the information included in the notice effect command is changed to the rank indicated by the information included in the notice effect command. Depending on the pattern, it can be displayed in the notice effect area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

  After the announcement effect pattern is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is maintained until the next announcement effect pattern is determined, that is, until the next announcement effect rank determination process is performed. You. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 performs sound output according to the announcement effect of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e, and controls the lamp display.

  In addition, in the notice effect by the character appearance 154, as described above, the pattern of the notice effect is not determined by the notice effect itself, but the pattern determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 performed immediately before. Perform a notice production with the same rank pattern. Here, after the notice effect pattern is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is maintained until the next notice effect pattern is determined. Therefore, when performing the notice effect by the character appearance 154, As the value of the judgment rank counter 223e, the value of the judgment rank counter 223e when the pattern of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is maintained. Therefore, when performing a notice effect by the character appearance 154, the notice effect is performed only in the pattern of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at that time, and is the same as the pattern determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153. A preview effect can be performed in a rank pattern.

  The second pointer 223f, when determining the pattern of the announcement effect, does not select a pattern with a rank lower than the expectation that will be a jackpot of the pattern determined in the announcement effect performed earlier in the same variable effect. Is a pointer for

  In the second pointer 223f, "99" which is the maximum value that the notice effect counter 223e can take when the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is started is set (S2113 in FIG. 33). ). Then, each time the pattern of the notice effect is determined in one fluctuation effect, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f (FIG. 36). S2144).

  As described above, when determining the pattern of the notice effect, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b (see FIG. 13) of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e and the value of the notice effect counter 223d. The comparison is performed (S2141 and S2142 in FIG. 36). In the comparison, if it is determined that the value of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is set to 1 Before the subtraction (S2147 in FIG. 36), the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at that time is compared with the value of the second pointer 223f (S2145 in FIG. 36). , S2146). As a result, when the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the rank indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e at that time (the value of the determination rank counter 223e before being decremented by 1). Is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect.

  When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, a pattern having the same rank as the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is used in a previously announced effect in the same variable effect. It means that it was decided. When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f as in the present embodiment, the pattern of the rank indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect. By configuring, when the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain preliminary production during the variable production, in the next preliminary production (the subsequent preliminary production), when determining the pattern of the preliminary production, A pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expected degree of jackpot than the one rank can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  Further, in the preview effect in which an image indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when a lower expectation degree than the expectation value of the jackpot indicated in the previous notice effect is indicated, The user may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched is shown. In this case, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may decrease the willingness to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when the expected degree of winning the rank of one rank is indicated in a certain notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect is performed. In (the subsequent announcement effect), when determining the pattern of the announcement effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower expectation degree of big hit than the one rank can be non-selected. Further, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined and the expectation degree of the jackpot is shown to the player. Among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation degree of one rank in the cut-in image is expected. Is displayed, in a subsequent cut-in image, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation of a big hit than that one rank can be deselected.

  Thereby, after the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain noticed production during the variable production, in the subsequent noticeable production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank, or the pattern corresponding to the one rank, Also, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is shown high, so that the player is less interested. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the expectation of the jackpot is maintained or increased over a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of the jackpot will increase, In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting a so-called upswing. In addition, for a notice effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed by operating the frame button 22, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  In addition, each time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f, and when the pattern of the notice effect is newly determined, When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the configuration is such that the pattern of the rank indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect, so that a certain rank is set. Each time the pattern is determined, even if the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is not changed so that the pattern of a rank lower than that rank is determined as the announcement effect pattern, Using the value, the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement production performed in the same variable production Remote low rank of the pattern can be a non-select a. Therefore, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b does not need to be stored in the ROM 222 for each type of rank to be deselected, and the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is reduced. In the meantime, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect can be deselected.

  The frame button operation flag 223g is a flag indicating that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player has been received. Shows the rest.

  The frame button operation flag 223g is set to an initial value "OFF" in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on. Then, in the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A, the player gives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation reception period provided in each of the preview displays by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155. Is received, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to ON (S2123 in FIG. 34). The MPU 221 executes a notice effect rank determination process in the notice effect of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the frame button operation flag 223g is turned on, and changes the notice effect pattern. It is determined (S2135 in FIG. 35). In addition, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to off at the same time as performing the notice effect rank determination processing (S2134 in FIG. 35). In this way, in each of the preview effects by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the player instructs the operation of the frame button 22, the preview effect pattern is determined, and the notification is performed based on the determined pattern. You can make a production.

  The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed, and indicates whether or not to start a variable display. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 32) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed. The change start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 32), and turned off when the change display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33).

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. As described above, in the variable production by the normal reach A or the super reach A, during the frame button operation acceptance period provided for the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the notice production by the cut-in 155, the player presses the frame button 22 by the player. When the operation instruction is received, the pattern of the notice effect is determined, and the notice effect is performed based on the determined pattern. Further, when an operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is received during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed, the audio output device 226 and the lamp are changed so that the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. It controls the display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is a sensor for detecting vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the back of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, since the ball entering the entrance is an important factor in determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by the vibration, and the intentional entry into the entrance is prevented. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, displays a variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as that of the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine). The ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598 is not provided and stored, but is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. Further, the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. To the video RAM 235 for normal use and the video RAM 236 for normal use.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data can be stored in the third symbol display without storing and storing the dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) like a conventional gaming machine. Since the image data to be displayed on the device 81 can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the number of components can be increased. This can suppress an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the above.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a so as to avoid a defective data block. (See, for example, JP-A-2006-223598).

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed amount of data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) by the work RAM 233. Is programmed to be transferred to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and performs various operations. Processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot program, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see FIG. 37 (a)) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S2201 in FIG. 37 (a)) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. The start address of the program corresponding to (a) S2202) is set.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. , MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) transmitted from the MPU 231 and described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various kinds of information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 includes at least a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a rear image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. .

  The power-on main image area 235a is, like the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, a period from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image at power-on, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 37A).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first, and supplies the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 switches to the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, on the display screen of the main image at the time of power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “O” at the lower right position toward the screen, and, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is "big hit", the image shown in FIG. 15B is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and when it is "out", the image shown in FIG. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs drawing of the main image at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. it can.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 264, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the main time image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams illustrating three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 16B shows the back surface B corresponding to the “sky stage”, FIG. 16B shows the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage”, and FIG. Respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B among the back surfaces A to C are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is provided in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “city stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 changes the initial position of the display area from the first position a to the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, the back image on the back surface C is displayed in the third display in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back C is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage” by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17A, an orange sky indicating dawn is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color of the sky begins to gradually change from black to white and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 17A, and the back images of FIGS. 17A to 17C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, a game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage, which is frequently displayed, is displayed in the rear image area. By resident in the 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage stores only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, in the resident video RAM 235. Is stored in the back image area 235c. The back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 17A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 17A and 17B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process, and is resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may increase costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a 'or the range of FIGS. 17 (a) to (b). The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image between FIGS. 17A and 17B is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed. By using the image data resident in the 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So also may be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 17A so that the transfer of the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 17B to 17C and FIGS. 17C to 17A from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. To (b) are set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 17A and 17B are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 17B and 17C and FIGS. 17A and 17B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 17B to 17C and FIGS. 17C to 17A can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes. it can.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 14) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow leftward in a smooth connection.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4), which are numbered from "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 187 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one fluctuation effect. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Accordingly, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as in the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10, like the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the occurrence of the vibration error by a display control device by an error command. Notify 114. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving an error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops one frame of the image drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a clock counter. 233i, a stored image determination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, For an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on a command from the device 110, an additional data table describing display contents to be displayed with time and a display data table are displayed. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in a certain effect, and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, a demo effect A display data table corresponding to a fixed display effect and a restart effect is provided.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that a game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the final display effect is a third symbol display device when the stop symbol is finally displayed by receiving a final command (display final command) from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 after the variable effect. It is an effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a departure symbol, an effect that emphasizes the departure is performed, and when the stop symbol is any one of a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot, each of the jackpots is emphasized. Direction is performed. By visually recognizing the confirmed display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

  In addition, the restart effect is performed around the predetermined position when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. This is an effect of displaying an image obtained by vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and then the third symbol vibrates and is displayed, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect, and the restart effect. Further, as for the display data table for fluctuation which is the display data table for the fluctuation effect, if there are 32 fluctuation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Further, in the fluctuation display data table, when the fluctuation effect pattern instructed by the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed when the fluctuation effect is stopped and displayed, for example, A display pattern table for special fluctuation, which is used when the main control unit 110 instructs a stop symbol to be out of order when the effect pattern is a winning fluctuation effect pattern, is also prepared. This special variation causes the third symbol to fluctuate and display at a high speed until the final command (display final command) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 is received, and the final command is received. In accordance with, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as “3”, “4”, or “1” in order from the left column) indicating a departure is determined as a stop symbol.

  If the variable effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variable effect, the display control device 114 controls the main control device 110 There is a possibility that it is not possible to perform a floating effect or a fixed display effect by correctly reflecting the result of the drawn lottery. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special fluctuation effect is performed, and after the fluctuation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special departure is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a jackpot confirmation display effect. Even if the special stop symbol is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the finalized display is out of the way, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the display data table for fluctuation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for designating an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect expressing insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the display data table for fluctuation. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and the offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time has elapsed. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 18) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Each time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233g is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233g is added based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, so that the image specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It was done. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, adding or deleting another image to one effect. The concept includes the concept of displaying, displaying, or changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding or deleting a new image and displaying it for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on a command from the main control device 110. Or the drawing content necessary to change the color tone of part or all in one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one production It is.

  In the present embodiment, a notice effect that is additionally displayed in addition to the change effect displayed by the change display data table selected based on the change pattern command (display change pattern command) from the main controller 110. The case where the display content for displaying is specified by the additional data table will be described.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to a notice effect that is additionally displayed for the variable effect, and specifically, five patterns prepared for the notice effect by the comment display 151, Five patterns prepared for the notice production by the child character appearance 152, a notice production by the super reach selection 153, five patterns prepared for the notice production by the character appearance 154, and a notice production by the cut-in 155 Are stored in the data table storage area 233b. The additional data tables respectively correspond to the five patterns prepared for.

  In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed on the image of one frame, the type of the sprite is defined, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, Drawing information, such as a translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, two effects (effect 1 and effect 2) and two characters (character 1 and character 2) are associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, respectively. (Split type (effect type, character type)), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information.

  In addition, in the additional data table, the content of the image to be deleted and displayed from the image to be displayed at the time indicated by the address in the display data table, corresponding to the address specified in the display data table. Is also stipulated. In this case, the type of the sprite to be deleted and displayed and the information indicating that the sprite is to be deleted are defined in the address of the emerged data table.

  On the other hand, if there is no display object to be added or deleted and displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the additional data table does not include the display object to be added corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (address “0001H” in FIG. 19 corresponds).

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 19, “00FDH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the additional data table The contents are described.

  When the MPU 231 receives the announcement effect command from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads an additional data table corresponding to the type and pattern of the announcement effect indicated by the announcement effect command from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the additional data table in the work RAM 233 described later. The data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is read from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Then, the image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. If a sprite to be deleted is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, a drawing list is created without including the sprite, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0097H” of the additional data table in the various sprites specified in the address “0097H” of the display data table. A drawing list is created by adding the sprites of Effect 1, Effect 2, Character 1, and Character 2, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is “0001H”, since null data is defined in the address “0001H” of the additional data table, it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ 0001H ”, a drawing list is generated based on various sprites. When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233g indicates the address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the drawing is performed based on the various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is issued. As a result, in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added or deleted. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. In addition to the effect image to be displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (for example, a fluctuation effect image), another image (for example, a notice effect image) is displayed, or a specific image is deleted from the effect image to be displayed. In the case where the additional image table is displayed, the additional image table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e in expectation of the image to be added or deleted, and the additional image is easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Or delete the deleted image from the base image. Thus, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a provisional display of an image in which another effect image is superimposed on each original effect image is provided. If a data table is separately prepared, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, a data table corresponding to another effect image, such as the pachinko machine 10, is used as an additional data table. By separately defining, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of presentation modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the presentation images.

  Also, as in the present pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even if the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, the additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. By simply setting the effect image in the data table buffer 233e, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be easily displayed in addition to the original effect image.

  Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e are stored. From the table, while updating the pointer 233g every time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed are displayed. By defining the display content in the additional data table, various effects can be easily displayed from a small number of data tables.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  For example, in the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A, each notice effect by the comment display 151, the child character 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155 is performed during the variable effect. Therefore, in the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table that regulates the display of the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A, the image data of the image that can be displayed in each of the preview effects is displayed. Transfer data information of the image data is defined so that the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a before the start.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 20 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233f of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is read from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Specifically, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is obtained from a transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. And adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233g becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table in the display data table and the additional data table. The drawing list created based on the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is “0002H”, since null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 37A) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2205 in FIG. 37A). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3105 in FIG. 49B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 38). When 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 38 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 38 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is performed). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 39 to 43) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 48) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 49A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233g by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The additional data table buffer 233e causes the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to additionally display the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like from the audio lamp control device 113. This is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect (such as a notice effect). The MPU 231 writes the Null data, which means that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233e, at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Clear the contents.

  After that, based on a command or the like from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to display in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not there is an effect to be additionally displayed, and an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233g by one, and stores the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. Based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described below is described for each frame, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. When the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, so that the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed as it is.

  The transfer data table buffer 233f stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233f. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the content by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233g indicates a corresponding drawing content or a transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f. This is for specifying an address from which data transfer data information should be obtained. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (S2403 in FIG. 38) During the pointer update process (see S2711 in FIG. 44), the value of the pointer 233g is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233g is performed, the MPU 231 reads the address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Is specified, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) to be described later is created, and a predetermined sprite from which transfer is to be started at that time is determined from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. The transfer data information of the image data is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  Thus, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. . Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 21, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g and other images to be drawn. (E.g., a reserved image for displaying a reserved ball number design, a warning image for notifying of the occurrence of an error, and the like), and detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame. ) Is generated and the drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type defined in the display data table and the additional data table, and other image contents. Generated according to the type of sprite. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 displays the display data table and the additional data on other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and generates detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data should be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (see FIG. 38) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233i is decremented by one (see S2713 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image determination flag 233j indicates whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not the storage state is present.

  The stored image determination flag 233j is generated by an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 37A) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that of the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite in which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reads the image of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3216 in FIG. 50). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3217 in FIG. 50). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 51).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38) is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 51).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a startup process and The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When they reach 899, 99, 99, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the No. 64 (S1105). The details of the fluctuation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the fluctuation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This fluctuation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22), and controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S1201). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit and the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S1201: Yes), this process is terminated.

  If it is not a jackpot (S1201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 has stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1203: No), the present process ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1204, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N of the variable display retained in the main control device 110). Is determined to be greater than or equal to 0 (S1204), and if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number) N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203c to the execution area side. The reserved first area → the execution area, the reserved second area The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on hold → the third area on hold. After the data shift processing, a fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a (the number N of retained balls) is 0 (S1204: No), a state in which a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, Then, it is determined whether or not the demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the reserved ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0. It is determined that the interval is under demonstration.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S1208: No), a demonstration command is set (S1209), the process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S1208: Yes), This processing ends as it is. The demo command set in the processing of S1209 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output processing (S1701) of a main processing (see FIG. 28) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display a demonstration effect according to the demo command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the fluctuation display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop, a demonstration command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (decided according to the change pattern command), and the change time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 2 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one every time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. When the counter reaches 200, the LED is turned on. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, by the process of S1206, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, and if the big hit, the first hit type Depending on the value of the counter C2, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variable jackpot (the maximum number of rounds changes to the high probability state after 15 rounds of high probability) after a jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (the maximum probability is 2 rounds and the high probability state after 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a symbol that becomes a probability change jackpot that shifts to a state or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability change hits after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability change hit occurs, and the red LED and the blue LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. In step S1213, a determination command is set in order to determine the value. When receiving the confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the elapse of the fluctuation time, and the stopped symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, the change start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This change start processing (S1207) is executed in the change processing (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , A "big hit" or a "missing" lottery (whether or not) is determined, and the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the change start process, first, a lottery (win / fail judgment) process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state, “7,307,582” associated with “low-probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random value, and When the ten gaming states are in the high-probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, and“ 28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213 ”associated with“ high-probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random numbers. In the processing of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random numbers, and if they match, it is determined that a big hit has occurred. Determine.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S1301, if it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S1301: Yes), the big hit at the time of the big hit based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The display mode is set (S1302). In this processing, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the maximum round number is 15R certain variable jackpot which shifts to the high probability state after the 15 round jackpot, or the maximum round number is 2 The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on the 2R probability variable jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the round jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot that shifts to the low probability state after the 15 round jackpots ( The lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In addition, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot types (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot) are stopped in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) at the time of the big hit is determined (S1303). This variation pattern is determined based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is not a jackpot (S1301: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or completely out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. I have.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S1305). The determination of the variation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (high-probability state, medium-time reduction, or low-probability state excluding medium-time reduction), the stop type set in the process of S1302, and the variation type counter CS1. And the deviation pattern table 202d for deviation. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the processing of S1303 or S1305 is completed, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern type determined in the processing of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 28). You.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64. , And hold processing of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S1401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the number-of-retained-balls counter 203a (the number N of the variable effects retained in the main control device 110) is determined. It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). Then, is there no prize in the first entrance 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S1402: No). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number N of reserved balls is less than 4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of reserved balls) is changed. One is added (S1403), and the values of the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the above-mentioned step S1103 are stored in the empty reserved area 203c of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area (S1404).

  Next, a reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number N updated by the processing of S1403 is created (S1405), the created reserved ball number command is set (S1406), and the start winning processing is ended. Return to the timer interrupt processing. This command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (FIG. 28). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the reserved ball number N included in the reserved ball number command.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 311, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not, it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1611 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1611 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1612, S1613).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1605: Yes), S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S1101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the number of retained balls set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). Then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65 (large open). A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the opening 65a is executed (S1704). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 83 The variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes from S1701 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1706, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 26 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1919 (see FIG. 30). ) Is determined (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1916 in FIG. 30), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1919. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1919 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is OFF (S1802: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure and the power-off processing in S1919. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1804. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1919 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the flow shifts to S1808.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1919, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1919 (see S1918 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1919 is executed, the process of S1808 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1919 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S1809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810). The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1808 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of step S1808 to step S1806 is executed. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process skips S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1810), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1811), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1809 is skipped is that when the process from S1804 to S1808 is performed via the process in S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1804. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the last execution of the process of S1901 (S1901). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), the process proceeds to S1902. The processing shifts to S1914 without performing the processing of S1912. When the process of S1901 is performed for the first time, the process proceeds to S1902.

  In the process of S1901, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S1902 to S1913 are processes related to display and audio settings (that is, effect settings) and need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the change setting process in S1914 and the command determination process in S1915 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1914 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1903 to S1915 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1910 to be described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1904). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1905, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update processing is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed. Sent to 114. In the pending number display update process, a process of turning on the pending lamp 285 according to the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring process, an input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the player is monitored, and an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is performed. This is a process for setting to be performed. The details of the frame button input monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring process ends, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is lower than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process ends, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and the sound output device 226 is set to output an alarm sound (S1953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the control device 114 that a vibration error has occurred is set (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30). Accordingly, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 30, the description of the main processing will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is completed, a notice effect process is executed (S1909). This notice effect process is a process for executing a notice effect during the variable effect when the variable effect is performed by the normal reach A or the super reach A. Details of the notice effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the notice effect process (S1909) is completed, a lamp edit process is executed (S1910), and then a sound edit / output process is executed (S1911). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. When the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 31) (see S1953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and Output from the output device 226.

  After the processing of S1911, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1912), and thereafter, the counter updating processing is performed (S1913), and the flow shifts to the processing of S1914. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1910 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1911 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the counter updating process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, updating of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and updating of the notice effect counter 223d are performed in the counter updating process. The updating of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Further, the update of the notice effect counter 223d is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99).

  In the process of S1914, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. A fluctuation setting process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of the change setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the change setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1915). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1915 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1916). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1918), and the power-off processing is executed (S1919). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1920), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1917), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1917: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1917: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, a command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1915). This command determination process (S1915) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2001). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type (any of variation A to E or 2R variation) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. . The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in a variation setting process (see FIG. 33) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by a display variation pattern command, and a variation effect is produced on the third symbol display device 81 according to the notified detailed variation pattern. Done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the change start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted and the RAM 233 is extracted. (S2005), and returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is next determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number command is retained in the main control device 110). The number of retained balls of the variable effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio ramp control device 113 (S2007).

  Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first ball entrance 64, every time there is a starting winning, the process of S2007 is performed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of starting winning detection, the audio lamp control device 113 The value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  After the processing in S2007, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a updated in the processing in S2007 is set (S2008), and the process returns to the main processing. . As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing in S2006, when it is determined that the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2010), and shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as a display demonstration command and a display confirmation command by the process of S2010, and transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the fluctuation setting processing (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the change setting process (S1914). This fluctuation setting processing (S1914) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and displays the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. In order to make the display control device 114 determine a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and notify the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114, To generate a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, and to transmit the generated display variation pattern command and display stop type command to the display control device 114. Is a process to be set. In addition, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated with the display of the variable effect, and a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved ball number. Further, when the determined detailed variation pattern is the normal reach A or the super reach A for performing the announcement effect, a process relating to the control of the announcement effect is also performed.

  In the variation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). If it is determined that the variation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the variation setting command is not received from the main control device 110, and the variation setting process is performed. End and return to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 32). From the RAM 223, the variation pattern type (variation A to E or 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2005 are acquired (S2103).

  Then, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is read, and the detailed fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b, the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type obtained by the processing of S2103, and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a. Is determined (S2104).

  The variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 includes only the variation time. However, in S2104, one of various detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time is selected. One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed.

  For example, when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation A (variation time 30 seconds), one variation pattern is selected from detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time 30 seconds. You. Normal reach A is a detailed variation pattern selected when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation A (variation time 30 seconds). When the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation B (variation time 60 seconds), one variation pattern is selected from detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time 60 seconds. You. The super reach A is a detailed variation pattern selected when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation B (variation time 60 seconds).

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. (S2105).

  In addition, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started. Further, by receiving the display stop type command, the display control device 114 selects a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type, and when confirming and displaying the fluctuation effect started by the display fluctuation pattern command, The selected stop symbol is displayed.

  Then, the value of the number-of-reserved-balls counter 223a is reduced by one in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, when the reserved ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball is performed). (S2107), a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the updated reserved ball number counter 223a (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the held balls by counting the number of the held ball symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A for performing the notice effect (S2109). If the normal fluctuation pattern is the normal reach A or the super reach A for the notice effect, (S2109: Yes), the notice effect flag 223c is set to ON (S2110). As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 performs control to perform a notice effect during the variable effect.

  Then, based on whether the stop type of the fluctuation effect set this time is out of place or a big hit, and whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A, the determination upper limit pointer 223g for determining the pattern of the notice effect becomes a big hit. An expected value is set for each rank of the expected value (S2111), and a notice effect pattern is set based on whether the stop type of the change effect set this time is out of range or a big hit, and whether the change pattern is normal reach A or super reach A. The maximum rank of the expected value which is a jackpot that can be determined as is set (S2112).

  Specifically, when the stop type is the big hit, regardless of the variation pattern, as the process of S2111, “9” is set as the determination upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern in which the degree of expectation of the big hit indicates the rank “5”. For the pattern whose expected degree of jackpot indicates rank “4”, “49” is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d, and for the pattern whose expected degree of jackpot indicates rank “3”, the judgment upper limit pointer is set. “69” is given as 223d, and “49” is given as a judgment upper limit pointer 223d for a pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree indicates rank “4”, and a pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree indicates rank “1”. On the other hand, “99” is given as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d. Also, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is a jackpot that can be determined as the notice effect pattern is set to “5”.

  If the stop type is out of range and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A, as the process of S2111, “19” is set as the determination upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree indicates the rank “4”. The determination upper limit pointer 223d is given to a pattern having a jackpot expectation degree indicating rank "3", and the determination upper limit pointer is given to a pattern having a jackpot expectation rank "2". "49" is given as 223d, and "99" is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree indicates the rank "1". Also, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value which is a jackpot that can be determined as the notice effect pattern is set to “4”.

  When the stop type is out of range and the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach A, “1” is given as the determination upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern in which the degree of expectation of winning is the rank “3” as the process of S2111. , "9" is given as a determination upper limit pointer 223d to a pattern having a jackpot expectation degree of rank "2", and a determination upper limit pointer 223d is provided to a pattern having a jackpot expectation degree of rank "1". Is given as “99”. In the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value which is a jackpot that can be determined as the notice effect pattern is set to “3”.

  Then, the second pointer 223f is set to the initial value “99” (S2113), and the fluctuation setting process ends. The announcement effect pattern is determined based on the settings in S211 to S2113.

  Next, the frame button input monitoring process (S1907) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring process (S1907). This frame button input monitoring process (S1907) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player Monitor and accept.

  In this frame button input monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a variable effect is being executed (S2121). If the variable effect is being executed (S2121: Yes), then a comment display 151, a super reach selection 153, or It is determined whether or not the frame button operation provided for the notice effect by the cut-in 155 is being accepted (S2122). Then, during the frame button operation acceptance period (S2122: Yes), the frame button operation flag 223g is set to ON (S2123), and the frame button input monitoring process ends. Thus, in each preview effect, the pattern of the preview effect is determined, and the preview effect is executed based on the determined pattern.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2122, if it is not during the frame button operation acceptance period (S2122: No), the frame button input monitoring process ends as it is. As a result, even if the frame button operation 22 is operated during the execution of the fluctuation effect and not during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation is invalidated.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2121 that the variable effect is not being executed (S2121: No), processing corresponding to the gaming state is executed (S2124), and the frame button input monitoring processing ends. In the process of S2124, for example, a process of changing a stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a description will be given of the announcement effect process (S1909) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the notice effect processing (S1909). This announcement effect process (S1909) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and performs the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A as described above. Is a process for executing a notice effect during the variable effect.

  In this announcement effect process, first, it is determined whether or not the announcement effect flag 223c is ON (S2131). If the notice effect flag 223c is not on but off (S2131: No), it means that the variable effect that does not include the notice effect is selected, and the present effect process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the notice effect flag 223c is ON (S2131: Yes), then, during any of the frame button operation acceptance periods currently provided for each notice effect of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155. It is determined whether or not there is (S2132). If the frame button operation acceptance period is in progress (S2132: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button operation flag 223g is on (S2133), and if the frame button operation flag 222g is off instead of on ( S2133: No), the preview effect process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the frame button operation flag 223g is ON (S2133: Yes), it means that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player has been received, and the frame button operation flag 223g is set to OFF (S2134). Thereafter, a notice effect rank determination process for determining a notice effect pattern is executed (S2135), and further, information indicating a rank of an expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the notice effect rank determination process and a notice effect pattern are determined. A notice effect command including information indicating the type of the notice effect (one of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155) is set (S2136), and the notice effect process ends. The notification effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing of S1902 of the main processing (FIG. 30). The details of the announcement effect rank determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  With this, in each of the announcement effects of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the player gives an operation instruction of the frame button 22, the announcement effect pattern is determined, and Accordingly, the image of the notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  Specifically, in the notice effect by the comment display 151, the image for prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is deleted, and the image shown in FIG. Displayed at 81. At this time, the color of the frame 163 (see FIG. 9A) of the balloon 162 is displayed according to the pattern determined by the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135).

  In the super reach selection 153, the character information in the speech bubble of the boy 166 that prompts the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is "Determine the destroyer! Press the button!" Instead, the third symbol display device 81 displays character information “Who is the destroyer?” That gives the player a sense of expectation as to who is the destroyer selected by operating the frame button 22.

  Note that, as described above, in the preview effect itself by the super reach selection 153, the determined pattern (rank of the expected value to be a big hit) is not notified to the player, and in the preview effect by the character appearance 154 performed next, The pattern (rank of the expected value to be a big hit) determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is notified to the player. In the present embodiment, similar to other preview effects, when a preview effect pattern is determined, a preview effect command is displayed including information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the preview effect rank determination process. Although transmitted to the control device 114, for the above reason, in the preview effect by the super reach selection 153, when the pattern of the preview effect is determined, the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the preview effect rank determination process is displayed. Instead of including the indicated information, an announcement effect command simply for notifying that the announcement effect pattern has been determined may be transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, in the preview effect by the super reach selection 153, by receiving the preview effect command notifying that the pattern of the preview effect has been determined, the display button of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is received. Instead of the character information in the speech balloon of the boy 166 prompting the operation, "Determine the destroyer! Press the button!"), The player is expected to be the destroyer selected by operating the frame button 22. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "Who is the destroyer?"

  In the announcement effect by the cut-in 155, the image prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation reception period is temporarily deleted, and the cut-in image shown in FIG. Display for seconds. At this time, the color of the cut-in frame 174 (see FIG. 12) is displayed according to the pattern determined by the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135).

  In the process of S2132, when it is determined that it is not during any of the frame button operation acceptance periods provided for the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155 (S2132: No), then It is determined whether the present timing is the execution timing of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 or the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided for the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137). As a result, when it is the execution timing of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 or the end timing of the frame button operation reception period provided for the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137: Yes), the processing of S2135 is performed. Then, after executing the notice effect rank determination process (S2135) for determining the notice effect pattern, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the notice effect rank determination process and the notice effect pattern are displayed. A notice effect command including information indicating the determined notice effect type (one of the child character appearance 152 and the super reach selection 153) is set (S2136), and the notice effect process ends. As described above, the notification effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing of S1902 of the main processing (FIG. 30).

  Accordingly, in the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the pattern of the notice effect is determined when it is time to execute the notice effect, and the image of the notice effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device. The color of the clothes 164a of the child 164 (see FIG. 9B) is displayed in accordance with the pattern determined by the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135).

  Also, in the preview effect by the super reach selection 153, if the player does not give an instruction to operate the frame button 22 during the frame button operation reception period, the pattern of the preview effect is determined at the end of the frame button operation reception period, At that time, instead of the character information in the speech balloon of the boy 166 that prompts the operation of the displayed frame button (“Please decide the destroyer! Press the button!”), The frame button 22 is operated. Character information “Who is the destroyer?” Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that the player has a sense of expectation that the selected destroyer is who.

  In this case as well, in the preview effect by the super reach selection 153, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the preview effect rank determination process is not included, and the preview effect pattern is simply determined. A notification effect command for notifying only may be transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, in the preview effect by the super reach selection 153, by receiving the preview effect command notifying that the pattern of the preview effect has been determined, the display button of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is received. Instead of the character information in the speech balloon of the boy 166 prompting the operation, "Determine the destroyer! Press the button!"), The player is expected to be the destroyer selected by operating the frame button 22. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "Who is the destroyer?"

  In the process of S2137, when it is determined that the timing is not the execution timing of the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 and the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137: No) Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a notice effect with the character appearance 154 (S2138). As a result, when it is determined that it is the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154, the process proceeds to S2136, and the expected value indicated by the notice effect pattern determined in the notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153 is displayed. A notice effect command including information indicating the rank of the character and information indicating the character appearance 154 as the type of the notice effect is set (S2136), and the notice effect process ends. Since the judgment rank counter 223e is held until the notice effect pattern is determined by the notice effect rank determination processing next, the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at the time when the processing of S2136 is performed is: The rank of the expected value indicated by the notice effect pattern determined in the notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153 is obtained. As described above, the notification effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing of S1902 of the main processing (FIG. 30).

  Thereby, in the announcement production by the character appearance 154, when the execution timing of the announcement production is reached, the rank of the expectation degree to be the big hit indicated by the pattern determined by the announcement production by the immediately preceding super reach selection 153 and According to the same rank pattern, an image of the announcement effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 11 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. At this time, the type of the character and the color assigned to the character are displayed according to the pattern determined in the announcement effect by the previous super reach selection 153.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2138 that it is not the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154 (S2138: No), the notice effect process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the notice effect rank determination processing (S2135). This notice effect rank determination processing (S2135) is executed in the notice effect processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes the notice effect pattern as described above. It is.

  In this announcement effect rank determination process, first, the determination rank counter 223e is set to the maximum rank of the determination rank set in the process of S2112 of the variation setting process (FIG. 33) (S2140). That is, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “big hit”, the maximum rank “5” of the determination rank is set. When the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out of place” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A”, the maximum rank “4” of the determination rank is set. When the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out of place” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable effect is “normal reach A”, the maximum rank “3” of the determination rank is set.

  Accordingly, in the subsequent processing, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is “big hit”, the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the notice effect are determined from the pattern corresponding to the rank “5” of the degree of expectation of the big hit. When the result of the fluctuation effect in which the comparison with the counter 223d is performed and the notice effect is performed is “out of place” and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “super reach A”, the rank of the expectation degree that is a big hit is obtained. From the pattern corresponding to “4”, a comparison is made between the determination upper limit pointer 222b and the notice effect counter 223d, and the result of the change effect in which the notice effect is performed is “out”, and the change pattern of the change effect is “normal reach”. A ”, the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the notice effect counter are counted from the pattern corresponding to the rank“ 3 ”of the degree of expectation to be a jackpot. Comparison with the 223d is performed. Therefore, if the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "out", at least the pattern corresponding to rank "5" is not selected, and the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "out". If the variation pattern of the announcement effect is “normal reach A”, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to rank “4” from being selected.

  Next, from among the upper limit value pointers 222b set in the process of S2111 of the fluctuation setting process (FIG. 33), the value U of the upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit indicated by the determination rank counter 223e. Is extracted and the value U is compared with the value A of the notice effect counter 223d (S2141), and it is determined whether the value A is equal to or less than the value U (S2142).

  As a result, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or smaller than the value U of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), the rank of the pattern for performing the notice effect is determined as the judgment rank. The rank is determined by the counter 223e (S2143). The determined rank is notified to the display control device 114 by a notice effect command, and the display control device 114 displays an image of the notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 in a pattern corresponding to the rank. By looking at the pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can recognize the rank of the expected degree of winning.

  After that, the value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b determined by the processing of S2143 is set to the second pointer 223f (S2144), and the announcement effect rank determination processing ends.

  Further, if the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: No), then the determination rank counter 223e Then, the value U of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b indicated by (2) is compared with the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2145), and it is determined whether the value U is equal to the value S (S2146). As a result, when the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is not equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2147), the value of the determination rank counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S2147). S2147), and returns to the processing of S2141. As a result, for the rank of the degree of expectation at which the rank is a jackpot that is lower by one, the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is compared with the value A of the notice effect counter 223d, and the rank is subjected to the notice effect. It is determined whether or not to rank.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2146, when the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the value is indicated by the determination rank counter 223e. This means that a pattern having the same rank as the rank to be determined has been determined in a preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the above-described process of S2143, and the rank of the pattern for performing the announcement effect is determined to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143). Then, the value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b determined by the processing of S2143 is set to the second pointer 223f (S2144), and the announcement effect rank determination processing ends.

  As a result, when the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production during the variable production, in the next preliminary production (the subsequent preliminary production), when the pattern of the preliminary production is determined, the first production is performed. A pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower degree of expectation to be a big hit than the rank of can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  Further, in the preview effect in which an image indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when a lower expectation degree than the expectation value of the jackpot indicated in the previous notice effect is indicated, The user may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched is shown. In this case, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may decrease the willingness to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when the expected degree of winning the rank of one rank is indicated in a certain notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect is performed. In (the subsequent announcement effect), when determining the pattern of the announcement effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower expectation degree of big hit than the one rank can be non-selected. Further, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined and the expectation degree of the jackpot is shown to the player. Among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation degree of one rank in the cut-in image is expected. Is displayed, in a subsequent cut-in image, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation of a big hit than that one rank can be deselected.

  Thereby, after the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain noticed production during the variable production, in the subsequent noticeable production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank, or the pattern corresponding to the one rank, Also, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is shown high, so that the player is less interested. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the expectation of the jackpot is maintained or increased over a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of the jackpot will increase, In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting a so-called upswing. In addition, for a notice effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed by operating the frame button 22, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  In addition, each time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f, and when the pattern of the notice effect is newly determined, When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the configuration is such that the pattern of the rank indicated by the value of the determination rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect, so that a certain rank is set. Each time the pattern is determined, even if the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is not changed so that the pattern of a rank lower than that rank is determined as the announcement effect pattern, Using the value, the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement production performed in the same variable production Remote low rank of the pattern can be a non-select a. Therefore, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b does not need to be stored in the ROM 222 for each type of rank to be deselected, and the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is reduced. In the meantime, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect can be deselected.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and a processing for one frame by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 315 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 performs various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 described in JP-A-2006-223598) like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of being provided and stored, it is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2211). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2212, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2212, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table and transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 37). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power-up initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 37A) (S2215), the execution of the boot program ends, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S2201) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 37B, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211 executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2212. May be a part of the boot program. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and further specifies the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. A process for setting the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S2211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. Processing for setting the start address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2211. After the process is repeated a plurality of times including the process of S2212 and S2212, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2213 to S2215 without performing the processes of S2211 and S2212. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Returning to FIG. 37 (a), the description will be continued. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, a process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2203, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2204). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S2204, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 49A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to perform the transfer is performed (see S3002 in FIG. 49A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 in the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38B), a simple command is displayed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 15 is drawn. A determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 38B) and a simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 38B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. If the change pattern is received via the device 113, that is, if the display change pattern command is received, the power-on change images shown in FIGS. 15B and 15C are immediately displayed during the change effect period. A simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2205, interruption permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S2206, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38A, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 38B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2402) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2403) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2402), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the display data table corresponding to the set display data table is set. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. If the notice effect command has been stored, the notice effect additional data table according to the type and pattern of the notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed in the third symbol. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), the third symbol display device 81 performs processing based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S2402) and the like. Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer the image to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when the rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is transmitted to the image controller 237. Is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2405) determined in the task processing (S2404) are used. 21. The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R certain change big hit, 2R certain change big hit, time saving big hit, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out) , Complete departure) and the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process of S2404 is executed. Move to.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2402), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2504). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S2504: Yes), the reserved ball number command processing Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40A, the details of the reserved ball count command process (S2505) will be described. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the pending ball number command processing. The reserved ball count command process executes a process corresponding to the display reserved ball count command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the reserved ball count command processing, first, a new reserved ball count command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display reserved ball count command has been processed in the ON state is turned on (S2601), and then the display reserved ball number command flag is turned on. The information on the number of reserved balls included in the ball number command is acquired (S2602). In the process of S2602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is obtained from the last stored display reserved ball number command. Thereby, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

  Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of other reserved balls is turned off. (S2603), and returns to the command determination process.

  With this, in the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number discrimination flag, the reserved ball count symbol corresponding to the reserved ball count corresponding to the set number discrimination flag set to on Is expanded so that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the processing of S2504 that there is no display pending ball count command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. Then, if there is a display confirmation command (S2506: Yes), a confirmation command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the determination command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the fixed command processing. This determination command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display determination command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the determination command processing (S2507), the determination command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display determination command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), the processing ends, and the command determination is performed. Return to processing. Thus, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is performed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. Execute In addition, when the display setting of the variable effect is processed, if the fixed command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display setting process is executed so as to cause the display to be set.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the processing of S2506 that there is no display confirmation command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demonstration command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), a demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the demo command processing (S2509) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 40C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command process executes a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the demonstration command processing (S2509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2621). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e. In the demonstration display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Since the drawing of an image is specified so that there is no corresponding transfer data table in the data table storage area 233b, Null data is also written in the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear its contents (S2622). ).

  Next, time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2624). The demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed in the ON state on the third symbol display device 81 is set to ON, and the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The definite display flag is set to off, and the definite display flag is set to off to indicate that the definite display effect is being performed in the on state (S2625).

  By executing the demonstration command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233g initialized in the processing of S2624, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2621 is updated. Then, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect specified in the demonstration display data table is measured using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. If it is determined that the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table has been completed by the timing of the display setting control clock counter 233i based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the Is controlled so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the processing of S2508 that there is no display demo command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and displayed. It is set in the data table buffer 233d (S2631).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in order to prepare for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table for fluctuation corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually performed by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 sends a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may give a sense of incongruity to the player.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the display data table actually longer than the set display data table Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the confirmation command from the main controller 110 is issued. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received. It is visually recognized as a part of the effect, and the change of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is observed without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is determined. You can kick it.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the additional data table buffer 233e (S2633).

  After that, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the process of S2631 is turned on, and The data table determination flag corresponding to the change display data table is set to OFF (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be determined. In the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the set fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later. Sets the display data table corresponding to the special fluctuation in the display data table buffer 233d as described later.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233i (S2635). The pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2636). Then, the determination command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the determination display flag are all turned off (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638), and the fluctuation pattern command is set. And returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S2636, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2631 is updated. From the address specified by the pointer 233g, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the 233f, and the image data of the sprite required in the set display data table for fluctuation is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. Bidet To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the RAM 236, controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233i in which the fluctuation time data is set by the process of S2635, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is performed. Is determined to have ended, a finalization display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a finalization command (a finalization command for display) is received from the main controller 110, and is determined within a predetermined time after the end of the variable effect. If the command (determination command for display) cannot be received, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display determination command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display determination command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination process, the determination of the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is performed first, so that the determination command process corresponding to the display determination command is always executed first, while the display The processing corresponding to the use variation pattern command is executed later, and the determination command flag set by the display determination command can be turned off by overwriting as in the processing of S2637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, the display Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination processing, the presence / absence of the display demonstration command is determined first, so that the demonstration command processing corresponding to the display demonstration command is always executed first, while the display demonstration command is always executed first. The processing corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed later, and the demonstration display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the variation display data table by overwriting, as in the processing of S2631. Can be. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the processing of S2510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation type command (S2511: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (any one of 15R probability change jackpot, 2R probability change jackpot, time savings jackpot, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out). The type table is determined (S2641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 38 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the display device 81 is finally set (S2642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2643).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the process in S2643, the comparison flag is turned on (S2644), the stop type command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is no contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the variation pattern command setting process and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, a display data table corresponding to the special fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233d as described later.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2642.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, even if it is actually off, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player In other words, the player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol that is completely deviated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of a big hit in practice. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the process of S2512 that there is no stop type command for display (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a notice effect command (S2514), a notice effect command process is performed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the notice effect command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the notice effect command processing. This announcement effect command processing is for executing a process corresponding to the announcement effect command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the preview effect command processing, the type of the preview effect (one of the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155) indicated by the information included in the preview effect command, and A preview effect additional data table corresponding to the pattern for executing the preview effect (a pattern indicating the rank of the expected value to be a big hit set by the voice lamp control device 113) is determined, and the determined additional effect for the preview effect is determined. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the additional data table buffer 233e (S2651). Then, the notice effect command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Thereby, in the display setting process, the variable effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the additional effect table for the notice effect stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S2651. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the dry-run effect is additionally displayed. As a result, the notice effect of the notice effect type designated by the notice effect command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the designated pattern, so that the player can expect a big hit from the notice effect pattern. Degree ranks can be shown. It should be noted that the image data used in the display of the preview effect is set in advance by the process of the variable pattern command process of S2632 when the super reach A or the normal reach A in which the preview effect is performed is designated by the display variation pattern command. According to the transfer data table corresponding to the super reach A or the normal reach A, the character data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the processing of S2514 that there is no notice effect command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). ), If there is a back image change command (S2516: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S2405) of the change of the back image resulting from the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to on (S2661). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2662), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the process of S2661 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the process of S2662. When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2662 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command incorrectly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined in the processing of S2516 that there is no rear image change command (S2516: No), then it is determined whether an unprocessed command includes an error command (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2521), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the error command processing (S2521) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2681). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2682). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2681, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set in the process of S2682, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process proceeds to S2682, in which error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Referring back to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S2520 (S2520: No), processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2522), and the processing returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S2502 to S2522 again. The processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the process of S2501 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The processing ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 15, that is, the display table fixing command, the display variation pattern Only the command and the stop type command for display are extracted, and the corresponding commands are defined command processing (see FIG. 40B), variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 41A), and stop type. A command process (see FIG. 41C) is executed, and a process of discarding other commands without executing a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 41A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2631. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on which are set and required in this case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuation image area at power-on 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2632, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIGS. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2701: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processing of S2702 to S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the new command flag is set to off (S2702), and then S2703 to S2710 The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new pending ball count command flag is ON (S2703). If the new pending ball count command flag is ON (S2703: Yes), the display command is displayed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and a reserved image setting process is executed (S2704).

  Here, the details of the reserved image setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting processing. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the display reserved ball number command. This is processing for expanding image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, referring to the number determination flag, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of retained balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is displayed in the reserved display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 4). (Refer to S2751). In the task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the reserved image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle is specified for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new reserved ball count command is set to OFF (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after the reserved image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, if it is determined that the new reserved ball count command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2703: No), then Then, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S2705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2706).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2761).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2705: No), then the comparison flag It is determined whether or not is ON (S2709). If the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), a comparison process is executed (S2710).

  Here, the details of the comparison processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the comparison processing. This processing is performed when the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is inconsistent with the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command based on the display fluctuation pattern command. In order to change the effect to a special fluctuation effect in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation until the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 is received. This is the process.

  In the comparison process, first, among the data table determination flags, the data table determination flag set to the ON state is specified, and the fluctuation data stored in the display data table buffer 233b is determined from the specified data table determination flag. The type of the display data table is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag set to the ON state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the fluctuation display data table specified by the processing of S2781 matches the stop symbol specified by the processing of S2782 (S2783). As described above, the display data table for variation is prepared for each variation pattern. ··and so on. Therefore, in the process of S2783, if the stop symbol is set to the big hit symbol, for example, although the display data table for variation corresponds to the variation pattern for deviation, it is determined that they do not match. .

  In the process of S2783, if it is determined that there is a match (S2783: Yes), the flow shifts to the process of S2788, the comparison flag is turned off (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S2783: No), first, the special variation display data table in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table are set. The contents are cleared by writing Null data to the buffer 233f, respectively (S2784).

  Next, a stop symbol determination flag corresponding to a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" from the left column) is turned on, and a stop symbol determination flag corresponding to another stop symbol. Is turned off (S2785), and the time data corresponding to the effect time of the special fluctuation effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2786). As described above, in the special fluctuation effect, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed until the decision command (display decision command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 is received. The effect time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Therefore, 3 minutes (180,000 milliseconds) / 20 milliseconds = 9000 is set in the time counter 233i as time data corresponding to the production time of the special fluctuation production.

  Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to off (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  As described above, if the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the display fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, a special Since the display data table for fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a special fluctuation effect in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, a special stop symbol is set as the stop pattern, so that when the final command (display final command) transmitted from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 is received, the special stop symbol is set. Can be fixedly displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  Here, if the variable effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 does not match the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variable effect, the display control device 114 uses the main control device. There is a possibility that the effect of the lottery performed at 110 may not be correctly reflected to perform the variable effect or the fixed display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special fluctuation effect is performed, and after the fluctuation display, a special stop symbol indicating a special departure is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the result of the lottery at 110 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from erroneously performing a jackpot confirmation display effect. Even if the special stop symbol is fixedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Can continue the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, by making the finalized display a special stop symbol, even if the finalized display is off, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state, The pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state despite the fact that the finalized display is out of the way, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after the comparison process (S2710) or in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to S2711. I do.

  In S2711, pointer update processing is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process is performed by using the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively, from the corresponding drawing contents or transfer. This is a process of updating the pointer 233g specifying the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be obtained.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S2791). That is, the pointer 233g is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233g is updated by the processing of S2791, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information or not. Is determined (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2793), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S2794), and further corresponds to the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the time counter 233i (S2795), and the flow shifts to the process of S2797. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2793 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the demonstration display data table nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 233g is displayed. The value is subtracted by 1 (S2796), and the flow shifts to the process of S2797. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a fluctuation display data table and a fixed display data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d, , And End information are always rendered, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the processing in S2792, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the processing in S2791 is not End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, S2793 to S2795 Is skipped, and the flow shifts to the process of S2797.

  In the process of S2797, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is on (S2797). If the confirmed command flag is not on but off (S2797: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is ON (S2797: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The value of the pointer 233g is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the end information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233d (S2798), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S2799), and returns to the display setting process. Thus, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table can be developed and the start of the confirmation display effect can be controlled.

  Returning to FIG. 44, after the pointer update processing, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e are used to determine the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update processing. The drawing content is developed (S2712). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S2712 together with the previously-deployed hold image, warning image, and the like. , Various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed on the assumption that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with Null data, Null data is always developed from the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Next, the value of the time counter g is decremented by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). If the value of the time counter 233i is equal to or greater than 1 (S2714: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a determination command (display determination command) is issued from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 114 in accordance with the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, and in the subsequent process of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is ON (S2715).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is ON (S2715: Yes), it means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 114. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively, thereby clearing the contents (S2716). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the finalized display is set in the time counter 233i (S2717), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, the set command flag is set to off (S2719), and then the set display flag indicating that the set display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2720). (S2721), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where a display data table for fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a determination command (determination for display) is issued from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. Command), the drawn content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set in the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before, and the fluctuation display data table uses the fluctuation based on the data table. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the symbol, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2721 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2715, if the finalization command flag is not on but off (S2715: No), the flow shifts to the process of S2722 shown in FIG. 45, and it is determined whether the finalization display flag is on (S2722). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) indicates that the confirmed display effect has ended, and the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S2723), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2724), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the time counter 233i (S2725). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt processing ends.

  By this, by the end of the final display effect, if the display fluctuation pattern command indicating the start of the next fluctuation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect has not been received, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The branch condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the confirmed display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are determined by the processing of S2716. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2722, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), then it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2728). If the demonstration display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) indicates that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends, and V Return to the interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2728, if the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after the lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the fluctuation effect, the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start the restart effect. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

  Then, when the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter has the predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are set to Null data, respectively. Is written to clear those contents (S2731). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2732), the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2733), and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, the display control device transmits the finalization command (from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect, even if a predetermined time has elapsed. When the display confirmation command) is not received, the content of the drawing can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect in which an image obtained by vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By visually checking that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the symbol is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time.

  After the last drawing content specified by the restart display data table is developed, the drawing content is developed again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update processing described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, in the restart effect, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner of vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary for swinging and displaying at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect in which the third symbol is vibrated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the restart symbol data table is swung at least once by the third symbol. Since only the drawing content necessary for display needs to be stored, the capacity required to store the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If a display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2716 shown in FIG. 47 is performed, and the display data table buffer is executed. A confirmed display data table is set in 233d. Accordingly, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display determination command, and the final display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  When the display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2631 in FIG. The display data table for fluctuation is set in the table buffer 233d, and the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2621 in FIG. A display data table for demonstration is set in the buffer 233d, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the variable effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 that should have been received is not received. Since the effect is displayed in such a case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demonstration command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the end of the fluctuating effect due to the fluctuating image at power-on, when a finalization command (a finalization command for display) is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, It is specified that one image (one of FIGS. 15B and 15C) of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. Further, after the end of the fluctuating effect time by the fluctuating image at the time of power-on, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 is not recognized. Performs a process of setting in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that the fluctuation effect of the fluctuation image at power-on is restarted.

  In the comparison process, the variation pattern designated by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type designated by the display stop type. c) Set).

  Next, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3001, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3101). If the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3102). In the process of S3102, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3102 (S3102: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to S3103. Also, as a result of the process of S3101, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3103.

  In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3103). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S3103: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident object image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3103, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 39 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S2408 in FIG. 39 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S2409 in FIG. 39 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 43) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 44 to 48) are executed, the normal drawing of the image is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S3001: No in FIG. 49A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update process (S2711) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403) from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3202). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3202: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. , The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process shifts to S3205.

  Further, in the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3202: No), the process of S3203 and S3204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3205), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S3205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3206).

  In the process of S3206, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3206 (S3206: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to S3207. Also, as a result of the processing in S3205, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3205: No), the processing shifts to S3207.

  In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207). If the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3208), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3207: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3212: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S3213), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the discrimination flags, the head address (storage source head address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state are stored, and the transfer is performed. The head address of the destination (the normal video RAM 236) is specified (S3214), the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S3216.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the processing of S3216, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216). The determination in the process of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236. It is determined that the image data is stored, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S3216, if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process ends as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3216, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Then, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3217, the stored image determination flag 233j is updated (S3218), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the transfer target image to “ON” and setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to transfer the image data to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2406), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405) (S3301). That is, in the process of S3301, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281 while the image drawn on one frame buffer is expanded, so that the drawing process and the display process can be performed simultaneously in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S3302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S3303). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 38) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of preview effects are performed in one variable effect. In each preview effect, the player is notified of the rank of the expected value that will be a big hit according to the pattern of the preview effect. In the first embodiment, in which pattern the preview effect is to be performed is not determined collectively in advance, but is determined for each preview effect. When the pattern of the notice effect is determined in each notice effect, the value of the notice effect counter 223d and the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b provided for each pattern (rank indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit) are determined based on the expected value. When the value of the notice effect counter 223d is determined to be equal to or less than the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to one rank, a pattern corresponding to the one rank is announced. Is determined as a pattern.

  Here, each time a pattern of a notice effect is determined in one variable effect, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) is set to the second pointer 223f. . When the pattern of the notice effect is determined, in the comparison between the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of a certain pattern (rank) and the value of the notice effect counter 223d, the value of the notice effect counter 223d becomes the judgment upper value pointer 222b. When it is determined that the value is larger than the value of the pattern (rank), the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern (rank) is compared with the value of the second pointer 223f. As a result, if the value of the determination upper-limit value pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the pattern at that time is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect.

  When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of a certain pattern (rank) is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, a pattern having the same rank as that rank is determined in a preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect. Means that it was done. When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f as in the present embodiment, the pattern of the rank to which the determination upper limit pointer 222b is given is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect. By doing so, when the expected degree of jackpot of one rank is indicated in a certain preliminary production during the variable production, the next preliminary production (subsequent preliminary production) determines the pattern of that preliminary production. A pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation degree of big hit than one rank can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  Further, in the preview effect in which an image indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when a lower expectation degree than the expectation value of the jackpot indicated in the previous notice effect is indicated, The user may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched is shown. In this case, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may decrease the willingness to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when the expected degree of winning the rank of one rank is indicated in a certain notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect is performed. In (the subsequent announcement effect), when determining the pattern of the announcement effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower expectation degree of big hit than the one rank can be non-selected. Further, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined and the expectation degree of the jackpot is shown to the player. Among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation degree of one rank in the cut-in image is expected. Is displayed, in a subsequent cut-in image, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation of a big hit than that one rank can be deselected.

  Thereby, after the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain noticed production during the variable production, in the subsequent noticeable production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank, or the pattern corresponding to the one rank, Also, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is shown high, so that the player is less interested. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the expectation of the jackpot is maintained or increased over a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of the jackpot will increase, In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting a so-called upswing. In addition, for a notice effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed by operating the frame button 22, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  In addition, each time the pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f, and when the pattern of the notice effect is newly determined, When the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is equal to the value of the second pointer 223f, the configuration is such that the pattern of the rank given the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect. Each time a rank pattern is determined, the same determination upper limit value is used without changing the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b so that a pattern of a lower rank than that rank is not selected as a notice effect pattern. Using the value of the pointer 222b, the expectation to be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect It can be a non-select a lower rank of pattern than. Therefore, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b does not need to be stored in the ROM 222 for each type of rank to be deselected, and the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is reduced. In the meantime, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect can be deselected.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the pattern of the notice effect, the pachinko machine 10 is performed before the same variable effect. The configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the announcement effect is not selected has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the second pointer 223f, and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is used for the notice. When the pattern of the notice effect is determined by changing the update range of the effect counter 223d, it is lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect. The configuration is such that the rank pattern is not selected.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, the configuration other than the above, and other than the notice effect rank determination processing (S2135), the counter update processing (S1913), and the command determination processing (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Various processes executed by each control device are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is a counter that determines the maximum value that the notice effect counter 223d, which is a loop counter, can take. The notice effect counter 223d is updated while looping from 0 to the value indicated by the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. That is, the update of the notice effect counter 223d is performed by the counter update process (S1913) of the main process (FIG. 30). In this counter update process, the notice effect counter 223d is incremented by one each time the counter update process is executed. When the value of the notice effect counter 223d after the addition is larger than the value stored in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is returned to 0, and the notice effect counter 223d is reset. Update.

  Here, if the value of the notice effect counter 223d after the addition becomes larger than the value stored in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is returned to 0. Even when the value of the maximum value memory 223h is set to a value smaller than the notice effect counter 223d, the value of the notice effect counter 223d can be set to 0 in the next update. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the notice effect counter 223d from becoming a value outside the range defined by the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h.

  When a new value is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, in particular, the value of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h to be newly set is smaller than the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that time. If so, the value of the notice effect counter 223d may be divided by the value of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h to be newly set, and the remainder may be newly set in the notice effect counter 223d. This also prevents the notice effect counter 223d from being outside the range defined by the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. In this case, since the value set in the notice effect counter 223d is not fixed to 0, the randomness for determining the pattern of the notice effect can be improved.

  In the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, an initial value “99” is set in a RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in a start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on. Although illustration is omitted, in the command determination process (FIG. 32), when the finalization command is received from the main control device 110, that is, at the stage when the fluctuation effect is finally displayed, the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is stored in the memory 223h. An initial value “99” is set. As a result, the notice effect counter 223d is normally updated in the range of "0" to "99". In the command determination process, when a command other than the finalization command is received from the main control device 110, the same process as that of the first embodiment is performed, and the description is omitted here.

  On the other hand, in one variable effect in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times, each time the notice effect pattern is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the notice effect counter maximum value. This is set in the memory 223h (S2151 in FIG. 53). As a result, thereafter, the notice effect counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. That is, it is possible to prevent the notice effect counter 223d from being updated in a range in which a pattern of a rank having a lower expectation that is a big hit than the determined pattern (rank) is selected. Therefore, in the subsequent announcement effect, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation to be a big hit than the rank of the pattern once determined can be non-selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the announcement effect rank determination processing (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the notice effect rank determination processing (S2135). The notice effect rank determination processing (S2135) is executed in the notice effect processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a processing for executing the notice effect pattern.

  Of the notice effect rank determination processing, the processing of S2140 to S2142, S2143, and S2147 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted here. However, in the process of S2142, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the process proceeds to S2147 as it is. Then, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is decremented by 1 (S2147), and the process returns to S2141. As a result, for the rank of the degree of expectation at which the rank is a jackpot that is lower by one, the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is compared with the value A of the notice effect counter 223d, and the rank is subjected to the notice effect. It is determined whether or not to rank.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2142, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the upper limit determination value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment. After determining the rank of the pattern for performing the announcement effect to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143), as a process different from that of the first embodiment, the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143 is determined. The value is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h (S2151), and the notice effect rank determination processing ends.

  As a result, thereafter, the notice effect counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. That is, it is possible to prevent the notice effect counter 223d from being updated in a range in which a pattern of a rank having a lower expectation that is a big hit than the determined pattern (rank) is selected. Therefore, in the subsequent announcement effect, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation to be a big hit than the rank of the pattern once determined can be non-selected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the notice effect counter 223d is changed from 0 to the notice effect counter maximum value memory. It is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the range of the value of 223h. The notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is normally set to “99”, and the notice effect counter 223d is updated in the range of 0 to 99. However, in one variable effect in which the notice effect is performed a plurality of times, the notice effect is performed. Is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. As a result, thereafter, the notice effect counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value, and thus is determined once in the subsequent notice effect. A pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation degree of big hit than a pattern rank can be deselected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  Further, in the preview effect in which an image indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when a lower expectation degree than the expectation value of the jackpot indicated in the previous notice effect is indicated, The user may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched is shown. In this case, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may decrease the willingness to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h as described above, when the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank in the notice effect during the variable effect is indicated, the following effect is obtained. In the announcement effect (the subsequent announcement effect), when determining the pattern of the announcement effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank having a lower expectation that is a big hit than the one rank can be deselected. Further, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined and the expectation degree of the jackpot is shown to the player. Among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation degree of one rank in the cut-in image is expected. Is displayed, in a subsequent cut-in image, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation of a big hit than that one rank can be deselected.

  Thereby, after the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain noticed production during the variable production, in the subsequent noticeable production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank, or the pattern corresponding to the one rank, Also, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is shown high, so that the player is less interested. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the expectation of the jackpot is maintained or increased over a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of the jackpot will increase, In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting a so-called upswing. In addition, for a notice effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed by operating the frame button 22, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  Further, every time a pattern of the notice effect is determined, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, so that the update range of the notice effect counter 223h is set. Can be a range in which a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation that is a big hit than the rank of a pattern once determined is not selected. Therefore, each time a pattern of a certain rank is determined, Even if the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is not changed so that the lower rank pattern is determined as the notice effect pattern, the same variable production is performed using the same value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b. The pattern with the rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement performance at It is possible. Therefore, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b does not need to be stored in the ROM 222 for each type of rank to be deselected, and the storage capacity required to store the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b is reduced. In the meantime, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect can be deselected.

  Further, in the first embodiment, it is relatively likely that a pattern having the same rank as the previously selected pattern (rank) is selected as the announcement effect, but in the second embodiment, the pattern is relatively relatively high. Thus, the possibility that a pattern having a higher rank than the pattern (rank) selected so far is selected as the announcement effect is increased. Therefore, it is possible to create more opportunities to give the player an impression that the degree of expectation to be a big hit increases, over a plurality of preview effects performed during one variable effect.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same operation and effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first or second embodiment, when the second pointer 223f or the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the notice effect pattern, A configuration has been described in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of a pattern determined in a preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect is not selected.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a rank determination table 222c is provided in the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 instead of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, and the determination rank counter 223e and the second In the case where the judgment rank memory 223i is provided without providing the pointer 223f and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h to determine the notice effect pattern, it is determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect. It is configured that a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the selected pattern is not selected.

  Note that, in the third embodiment, the configuration other than the above, and each control device other than the change setting process (S1914) and the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are executed. Various processes are the same as in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  The rank determination table 222c is a table in which the values of the different announcement effect counters 223d, which are different from each other, are associated with five ranks (ie, five patterns prepared for each announcement effect) indicating the expected value of the jackpot. When deciding the pattern of the notice effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank associated with the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that time is extracted from the rank determination table 222c, and the extracted pattern is determined as the notice effect pattern. I do. The rank determination table 222c is further divided into five tables.

  Here, the details of the five tables prepared in the rank determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 55A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the first rank determination table 222c1. The first rank determination table 222c1 is used to determine the pattern of the notice effect, to determine the pattern of the notice effect first after the start of the variable effect, or to determine the jackpot in the previous notice effect. This is a table that is referred to when only the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of “1” is determined.

  In the first rank determination table 222c1, whether the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a jackpot or a miss, and the variable pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A” or “normal reach” A different value of the notice effect counter 223d is associated with each rank (pattern) depending on whether it is “A”. In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”, the degree of expectation of the big hit is rank “1” to “5” regardless of the change pattern of the variable effect. In the case where the result of the variable effect in which a different effect of the notice effect counter 223d is associated and the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “out of place” and the change pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A”, The value of the different announcement effect counter 223d is associated with ranks “1” to “4” having the expected degree of jackpot, and the result of the variable effect in which the announcement effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “Normal Reach A”, the expectation degree of the jackpot is different for the ranks “1” to “3” and different notice production cows. The value of the data 223d is associated with.

  Thereby, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined at the very beginning after the variable effect is started, or in the notice effect so far, only the pattern corresponding to the rank of the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to “1” is determined. , The announcement effect pattern including the pattern corresponding to the rank “1” is selected.

  Next, FIG. 55B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the second rank determination table 222c2. The second rank determination table 222c2 is referred to when the pattern of the notice effect is determined when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of “2” has been determined in the previous notice effect. Table.

  Also in the second rank determination table 222c2, whether the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a jackpot or a miss, and whether the variable pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A” A different value of the notice effect counter 223d is associated with each rank (pattern) depending on whether it is “normal reach A”. In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”, the degree of expectation of the big hit is ranked “2” to “5” regardless of the change pattern of the variable effect. In the case where the result of the variable effect in which a different effect of the notice effect counter 223d is associated and the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “out of place” and the change pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A”, The value of the different announcement effect counter 223d is associated with ranks “2” to “4” having the expected degree of jackpot, and the result of the variable effect in which the announcement effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production is “Normal Reach A”, the expected degree of jackpot is different for the ranks “2” to “3” and different notice production cows. The value of the data 223d is associated with.

  In this way, if the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of jackpot of “2” has been determined in the previous announcement performance, the pattern corresponding to the rank “1” having a lower expected degree than the rank of “2” , But is not selected as a notice effect pattern.

  Next, FIG. 56A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the third rank determination table 222c3. This third rank determination table 222c3 is referred to when a pattern corresponding to the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of “3” has been determined in the previous notice effects when determining the pattern of the notice effect. Table.

  Also in the third rank determination table 222c3, it is determined whether the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a jackpot or not, and whether the variable pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A”. A different value of the notice effect counter 223d is associated with each rank (pattern) depending on whether it is "normal reach A". In addition, if the result of the variable production in which the notice production that determines the pattern is performed is “big hit”, the degree of expectation of the big hit is ranked “3” to “5” regardless of the fluctuation pattern of the variable production. If the value of the different announcement effect counter 223d is associated with the result of the variation effect in which the announcement effect for determining the pattern is performed is “out of place” and the variation pattern of the variation effect is “super reach A”, The value of the different announcement effect counter 223d is associated with ranks “3” to “4” having the expected degree of jackpot, and the result of the variable effect in which the announcement effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “normal reach A”, the expectation degree of the jackpot is rank “3” and the notice effect counter 223 d The value of all is associated.

  In this way, if the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit is “3” has been determined in the previous announcement effects, the ranks “1” and “2” having lower degrees of expectation than the rank of “3” Is not selected as a notice effect pattern. When the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit” and the variable pattern of the variable effect is “normal reach A”, the pattern of rank “3” is once selected. In the subsequent announcement effects, only the pattern of rank "3" is selected.

  Next, FIG. 56B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fourth rank determination table 222c4. The fourth rank determination table 222c4 is referred to when a pattern corresponding to the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of “4” has been determined in the previous notice effects when determining the pattern of the notice effect. Table.

  Also in the fourth rank determination table 222c4, different announcement effect counters 223d differ depending on whether the result of the fluctuation effect in which the announcement effect for determining the pattern is performed is a jackpot or a miss (variation pattern is only “Super Reach A”). A value is associated with each rank (pattern). If the result of the variable effect is out of order and the fluctuation pattern of the variable effect is “normal reach A”, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is not associated with any rank (pattern). . This is because the result of the variable production is out of range, and when the fluctuation pattern of the variable production is “Normal Reach A”, only the pattern up to rank “3” can be selected as the notice production pattern. It is.

  The fourth rank determination table 222c4 indicates that when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit”, the degree of expectation of the big hit is rank “irrespective of the change pattern of the variable effect”. The values of the different announcement effect counters 223d are associated with “4” to “5”, the result of the fluctuation effect in which the announcement effect for determining the pattern is “out of place”, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “ In the case of “Super Reach A”, all values of the notification effect counter 223d are associated only with the rank of “4” where the jackpot expectation degree is.

  In this way, if the pattern corresponding to the jackpot expectation rank of “4” has been determined in the previous announcement effects, the ranks “1” to “3” having lower expectations than the rank “4” Is not selected as a notice effect pattern. In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is “big hit” and the variable pattern of the variable effect is “super reach A”, the pattern of rank “4” is once selected. Then, only the pattern of rank "4" is selected in the subsequent announcement effects.

  Next, FIG. 56C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fifth rank determination table 222c5. The fifth rank determination table 222c5 is referred to when the pattern of the notice effect is determined when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the jackpot expectation degree of “5” is determined in the previous notice effect. Table.

  In the fifth rank determination table 222c5, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a jackpot, the notice effect counter 223d is provided only for the pattern in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot corresponds to the rank “5”. Are associated with each other. In this way, if a pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of jackpot of “5” has been determined in the previous announcement effect, the ranks “1” to “4” having lower expected degrees than the rank of “5” Is not selected as a notice effect pattern.

  When the result of the fluctuation effect is out of range, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is set to any rank (pattern) regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is “normal reach A” or “super reach A”. Not mapped. This is because, when the result of the fluctuation effect is out of order, only the patterns up to rank “3” or “4” can be selected as the notice effect patterns according to the fluctuation pattern.

  The judgment rank memory 223i is a memory that stores a rank of an expected degree which is a jackpot of a pattern determined in a previous noticeable effect in one variable effect. When deciding the pattern of the notice effect, the MPU 221 grasps the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern decided in the notice effect so far from the value of the judgment rank memory 223i, and uses the grasped rank to The rank determination table 222c to be executed is selected from the first rank determination table 222c1 to the fifth rank determination table 222c5.

  For example, when the determination rank memory 223i is “1”, the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is “2”, the second rank determination table 222c2 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "3", the third rank determination table 222c3 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "4", the fourth rank determination table 222c4 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "5", the fifth rank determination table 222c5 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used.

  As described above, when the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used, the pattern of the announcement effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank “1” of the degree of expectation to be a big hit, When another rank determination table, that is, an n-th rank determination table (n is 2 to 5) is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used, the rank corresponds to the rank having a lower jackpot than the rank “n”. Is not selected as a notice effect pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of the jackpot that is lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the previous announcement effect from being selected as the announcement effect pattern.

  Note that the determination rank memory 223i is set to “1” as an initial value when the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is started. Thereby, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined for the first time after the start of the variable effect, since the pattern of the notice effect is determined using the first rank determination table 222c1, the rank of the expectation degree which is the big hit is the lowest. The pattern of the notice effect can be determined, including the pattern corresponding to “1”.

  In addition, in the determination rank memory 223i, each time a pattern of a notice effect is determined in one fluctuation effect, a rank of an expected degree which is a big hit indicated by the determined pattern is set. As a result, the rank of the degree of expectation that will be a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect in one change effect can be stored in the determination rank memory 223i.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the change setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the change setting process (S1914). This fluctuation setting processing (S1914) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and similarly to the first embodiment, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display fluctuation pattern command are displayed. A process for generating a stop type command and setting the command to be transmitted to the display control device 114, a process for setting a display reserved ball count command to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball count, and When the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach A or the super reach A for performing the announcement effect, a process relating to the control of the announcement effect is performed.

  In this variation setting process, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed in the processes of S2101 to S2110 and S2114. However, in the process of S2109, when it is determined that the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A for performing the notice effect (S2109: Yes), the notice effect flag 223c is set to ON. Later (S2110), in the third embodiment, “1” is set in the determination rank memory 223i (S2171), the variation setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. Thereby, when the pattern of the notice effect is determined for the first time thereafter, the pattern of the notice effect is determined using the first rank determination table 222c1, so that the rank of the jackpot expectation degree corresponds to “1”, which is the lowest. It is possible to determine the pattern of the announcement effect, including the pattern to be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, details of the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the notice effect rank determination processing (S2135). The notice effect rank determination processing (S2135) is executed in the notice effect processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a processing for executing the notice effect pattern.

  In this announcement effect rank determination processing, first, a rank determination table 222c corresponding to the rank indicated in the determination rank memory 223i is set from the first to fifth rank determination tables 222c1 to c5 (S2181), and the set rank determination table 222c is set. Then, a pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of winning that is associated with the value of the notice effect counter 223d is determined as the notice effect pattern (S2182). Then, the rank of the determined pattern is set in the determination rank memory 223i (S2183), and the announcement effect rank determination processing ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the judgment rank memory 223i is provided, and in the judgment rank memory 223i, a large hit of the pattern determined in the previous noticeable effect in one variation effect is performed. Is stored. When deciding the pattern of the notice effect, the rank of the expectation which becomes the jackpot of the pattern decided by the notice effect is grasped from the value of the judgment rank memory 223i, and the rank judgment to be used is made from the grasped rank. The table 222c is selected from the first rank determination table 222c1 to the fifth rank determination table 222c5. That is, when the determination rank memory 223i is “1”, the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is “2”, the second rank determination table 222c2 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "3", the third rank determination table 222c3 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "4", the fourth rank determination table 222c4 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "5", the fifth rank determination table 222c5 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used.

  Here, when the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used, the pattern of the announcement effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank “1” of the degree of expectation to be a big hit. When the other rank determination table, that is, the n-th rank determination table (n is 2 to 5) is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be executed, the rank corresponds to the rank with a lower expectation that is a big hit than the rank “n”. The pattern is not selected as a notice effect pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of the jackpot that is lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the previous announcement effect from being selected as the announcement effect pattern.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  Further, in the preview effect in which an image indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when a lower expectation degree than the expectation value of the jackpot indicated in the previous notice effect is indicated, The user may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. If the player is given such an idea, in order to increase the willingness to participate in the game, in the notice effect, the degree of expectation to be a big hit when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched is shown. In this case, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may decrease the willingness to participate in the game.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect is grasped, and the rank judgment table 222c to be used is determined from the grasped rank. By selecting from the fifth rank determination table 222c5, a pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of jackpot that is lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the previous announcement effect is selected as the announcement effect pattern. Can be prevented. Further, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and the cut-in image is displayed every time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined and the expectation degree of the jackpot is shown to the player. Among the notice effects by the cut-in 155, the expectation degree of one rank in the cut-in image is expected. Is displayed, in a subsequent cut-in image, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a lower expectation of a big hit than that one rank can be deselected.

  Thereby, after the expected degree of the jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain noticed production during the variable production, in the subsequent noticeable production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as the one rank, or the pattern corresponding to the one rank, Also, a pattern corresponding to a rank having a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is shown high, so that the player is less interested. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the expectation of the jackpot is maintained or increased over a plurality of preview productions performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of the jackpot will increase, In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the notice effect while expecting a so-called upswing. In addition, for a notice effect in which an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed by operating the frame button 22, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  Further, in the third embodiment, in one variation effect, a rank determination table corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation to be a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement effect has to be prepared. However, depending on the rank of the expected degree that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement production, it is possible to finely set the probability that the pattern with the higher expected degree is selected it can. Therefore, the probability that the pattern of the rank with high expectation is selected can be set so that the interest of the player becomes more interesting, so that the pachinko machine 10 that can make the player more entertain by the notice effect is provided. Can be designed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments. be able to.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, in the case where a plurality of announcement effects indicating a jackpot expectation degree are performed in one variation effect, when determining a certain announcement effect pattern, the same variation is applied. By unselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed earlier in the production, in multiple preview productions performed during the one variable production The configuration that prevents the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is indicated high has been described.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when a plurality of preview effects indicating the expectation of the jackpot are performed in one variable effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot in a certain announcement effect is equal to or higher than the predetermined rank is obtained. Only in the case of the above, the pattern of the lower rank that is lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect performed in the same variable effect as the pattern of the subsequent notice effect is not selected. In a plurality of preview productions performed during one variable production, after a predetermined rank or higher is indicated as the jackpot expectation, it is prevented that the jackpot expectation becomes lower than the predetermined rank. It is configured as follows.

  In the fourth embodiment, components other than the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, and each of the components other than the change setting process (S1914) and the announcement effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113. Various processes executed by the control device are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is further provided with a high rank determination completed flag 223j as compared with the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

  The high rank determined flag 223j indicates that, in a variable effect in which a plurality of announcement effects indicating the expectation degree of a jackpot are performed, the expectation degree of the jackpot in a certain announcement effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (rank “4” in the fourth embodiment). Or a flag indicating that the pattern indicating “5”) has been selected. When the high rank determination completed flag 223j is on, in a variable effect in which a plurality of announcement effects indicating the expected degree of jackpot are performed, the expected degree of the jackpot in the previous announcement effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (rank “4” or This indicates that the pattern indicating “5”) has been selected. Also, when the high rank determination completed flag 223j is off, in a variable effect in which a plurality of announcement effects indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot are performed, the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the previous announcement effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (rank “4”). Or "5") is not selected, that is, a pattern lower than the predetermined rank (any of ranks "1" to "3") is selected.

  The high-rank-determined flag 223j determines a detailed variation pattern based on the detailed variation pattern counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern table 222a when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main control device 110. In this case, the MPU 221 temporarily turns off the notice effect flag 223c in accordance with the determined detailed variation pattern. Specifically, when the determined detailed variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the high-rank determination is performed in accordance with the setting of the notice effect flag 223c. Done flag 223j is temporarily set to off.

  Then, when selecting a pattern in one announcement effect, if the high rank determined flag 223j is off, the pattern of the announcement effect considers the pattern of the previous announcement effect executed during the same variable effect. Without performing, one pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks “1” to “5”. In other words, if the pattern of the notice effect performed up to that time during the same variable effect is a pattern corresponding to one of the ranks “1” to “3” having a low jackpot expectation, the rank “ One pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to “1” to “5”. Therefore, in this case, in one announcement effect, it is permitted that the degree of expectation of the jackpot becomes lower than the degree of the predetermined rank after the degree of expectation of the predetermined rank or more is indicated as the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

  When a pattern corresponding to a jackpot expectation degree of “4” or “5” is selected when a pattern in one announcement effect is selected, the high rank determined flag 223j is set to ON. Then, when a pattern is selected for a subsequent announcement effect, if the high rank determined flag 223j is turned on, the pattern of the announcement effect is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In the variable production, a pattern having a rank lower than the jackpot expected degree indicated by the pattern determined for the preview production performed earlier is not selected.

  Thereby, in a plurality of announcement effects performed during one variable effect, if the degree of expectation of a predetermined rank or more (rank “4” or “5”) is indicated as the degree of expectation to become a jackpot, then the jackpot becomes a jackpot. It is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from being lower than a predetermined rank (rank “4”). Therefore, during a certain variable production, after the expectation of a predetermined rank or higher with a high degree of expectation to be a big hit is indicated in the preliminary announcement production, the expectation lower than the predetermined rank is given by the subsequent preliminary production in the fluctuation production. Can be prevented. Therefore, after the expected performance of a predetermined rank or higher, which has a high degree of expectation to be a jackpot during a certain variable production, is displayed in the preliminary announcement performance, and then, in the variable production, the subsequent production of the preliminary announcement performance indicates a lower expectation than the predetermined rank. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the change setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the change setting process (S1914). This fluctuation setting processing (S1914) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, similarly to the first embodiment, and the fluctuation setting processing of the first embodiment is performed. The same processing as that shown in FIG. 33 is performed.

  Specifically, of the fluctuation setting processing, the processing of S2101 to S2113 is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, a detailed description of these processes is omitted. In the change setting process according to the fourth embodiment, when the detailed change pattern determined in S2104 is determined to be the normal reach A or the super reach A performing the announcement effect by the process of S2109 (S2109: Yes), the first process is performed. After the processes of S2110 to S2113, which are the same as those of the embodiment, are performed, the high rank determination completed flag 223j is set to off (S4001), and the variation setting process ends.

  The processing of S2110 to S2113 and S4001 is performed when the normal reach A or the super reach A, which is a fluctuation pattern for executing a plurality of announcement effects, is determined as a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed in the fluctuation setting process. This is a process for initializing parameters for determining a pattern of each announcement effect performed in the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A. In this initialization processing, by setting the high rank determined flag 223j to OFF, at the time of determining the pattern of the notice effect to be executed at least first after the start of the variable effect, the ranks “1” to “5” are determined. Can be selected from among the patterns corresponding to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the announcement effect rank determination processing (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the notice effect rank determination processing (S2135). The notice effect rank determination processing (S2135) is executed in the notice effect processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a processing for executing the notice effect pattern.

  Of the notice effect rank determination processing, the processing of S2140 to S2147 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, in the process of S2142, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the rank upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the high rank determined flag 223j. It is determined whether or not is ON (S4101). Then, if the high rank determination completed flag 223j is on (S4101: Yes), the processing of S2145 to S2147 is executed as in the first embodiment, and the processing returns to S2141 after the processing of S2147.

  Further, in the process of S2142, when it is determined that the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), or S2146. When the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is determined to be equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the same processing as in the first embodiment is performed. Next, after determining the rank of the pattern for performing the announcement effect to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143), it is determined whether the high rank determination completed flag 223j is ON (S4102). Then, if the high rank determination completed flag 223j is on (S4102: Yes), the same processing of S2144 as in the first embodiment is executed.

  As a result, when the high rank determined flag 223j is ON, that is, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit is “4” or “5” in the previous announcement effect, Similar to the first embodiment, in the subsequent announcement effect, when selecting a pattern in the announcement effect, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined in the announcement effect performed so far is selected. Can be unselected.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if the high rank determination completed flag 223j is not on, but is off (S4101: No), the process of S2145 and S2146 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2147. Thereby, irrespective of the rank of the notice effect performed so far, the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b and the value of the notice effect counter 223d are next determined for the rank of the degree of expectation at which the rank is the next lower jackpot. A is compared with A, and it is determined whether or not the rank is to be the rank of the pattern for performing the announcement effect. Therefore, while the high rank determination completed flag 223j is off, that is, the notice effect performed so far during the fluctuation effect indicates a low rank as the jackpot expectation degree, or the notice effect has never been performed. If not, one pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to ranks “1” to “5”.

  Also, in the processing of S4102, if the high rank determination completed flag 223j is not on but off (S4102: No), the rank of the notice effect determined in the processing of S2143 is “4” or “5”. It is determined (S4103) whether or not the determined rank is not “4” or “5” but “1” to “3” (S4103: No). I do. As a result, the process of S4104 described below is skipped, and the high rank determination completed flag 223j is kept off, and the next announcement effect also corresponds to the ranks "1" to "5". One pattern is selected from the patterns to be performed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4103, when it is determined that the rank of the announcement effect determined in the processing of S2143 is “4” or “5” (S4103: Yes), the high rank determination completed flag 223j is turned on. Is set (S4104). Then, the process of S2144, which is the same as that of the first embodiment, is executed, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143 is set to the second pointer 223f, and the announcement effect rank determination process ends. With this, when a pattern with an expected degree of jackpot of “4” or more (“4” or “5”) is selected in the notice effect, a pattern in the notice effect is selected in the subsequent notice effect. In this case, a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the announcement effect performed so far can be deselected.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in a variable effect in which a plurality of notice effects are performed, the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit as one notice effect pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (“4” or “4”). 5)), when a pattern is selected for a subsequent announcement effect, a pattern determined for a previous announcement effect in the same variable effect is selected. The pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot indicated by is selected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, despite the fact that the expected degree of jackpot was high in the previous announcement production, a low expectation was shown in the announcement production performed at the end of the variable production, and it was finally judged that the fluctuation production was off. When this happens, the discouragement of the player becomes very large, and there is a possibility that the will to continue the game is lost.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable production in which a plurality of preliminary productions are performed, the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit as a single preliminary production pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”). When the corresponding pattern is selected, if a pattern is selected for the subsequent announcement effect, the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the earlier announcement effect performed earlier in the same variable production Since the lower rank pattern is not selected, in a plurality of preview productions performed during one variable production, the expectation degree of a predetermined rank or more (rank “4” or “5”) as a jackpot expectation degree is obtained. When indicated, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation of a jackpot from being lower than the predetermined rank (rank “4”) thereafter. Therefore, during a certain variable production, after the expectation of a predetermined rank or higher with a high degree of expectation to be a big hit is indicated in the preliminary announcement production, the expectation lower than the predetermined rank is given by the subsequent preliminary production in the fluctuation production. Can be prevented. Therefore, after the expected performance of a predetermined rank or higher, which has a high degree of expectation to be a jackpot during a certain variable production, is displayed in the preliminary announcement performance, and then, in the variable production, the subsequent production of the preliminary announcement performance indicates a lower expectation than the predetermined rank. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lost.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the notice effect by the comment display 151 and the notice effect by the child character appearance 152 performed before the super reach change (see FIG. 8), a predetermined rank or more (“4” or “5”) is obtained. If the pattern corresponding to ()) is selected, only the reach species (thunder reach or Buddha-like reach) of a predetermined rank or higher can be selected as the reach species of the super reach variation. In other words, in this case, it is possible to guarantee that the reach species has a predetermined rank or higher. Generally, a player tends to place the most importance on the reach type of the super reach variation indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, among a number of announcement effects. In other words, the player is greatly delighted by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. Therefore, when a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or more (“4” or “5”) is selected in a notice effect by the comment display 151 or a notice effect by the appearance of the child character 152 performed before the super reach change, By assuring the player that a reach species (thunder reach or Buddha-reach) of a predetermined rank or higher appears as a reach variation of reach, the player can start a super reach variation with a certain level of security. You can watch.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments. be able to.

  In a variable effect in which a plurality of notice effects are performed, when a pattern corresponding to a rank of the degree of expectation that is a jackpot as a single notice effect pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”), In addition to the fourth embodiment, after that, a part or all of a preview effect (for example, a preview effect by the cut-in 155) performed by operating the frame button 22 may be non-executed. Further, after a pattern corresponding to a rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit as a pattern of one notice effect is equal to or more than a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”), the frame button 22 is operated to operate the pattern. If the frame button 22 is operated for a part or all of the announcement effect, the announcement effect is performed, but an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 may be hidden on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, during the announcement performance with a high expectation of the jackpot, for example, while the super reach fluctuation is performed by the reach species with the high expectation of the jackpot, the notice production and the super reach fluctuation are performed. The player can be concentrated, and the expectation that the player will win a jackpot can be further increased.

  Further, the selection is performed by operating the frame button 22 after a pattern corresponding to a rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit as a predetermined announcement effect pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”). When the frame button 22 is operated for a part or all of the preview effect, the preview effect is performed, but when the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the frame is displayed. When deciding the pattern of the notice effect performed when the button 22 is operated, the pattern of the rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier is determined as non-selection. Is also good.

  As described above, in the preview effect in which the image indicating the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation value of the jackpot shown in the previous notice effect is indicated. However, the player may think that the degree of expectation of the big hit has been reduced just by operating the frame button 22. On the other hand, when determining the pattern of the notice effect performed when the frame button 22 is operated, the rank of the rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier than that is determined. By making the pattern non-selection, in the preview effect, the expectation of the jackpot shown in the previous notice effect is maintained or increased, and therefore, the expectation of the jackpot is increased. The frame button 22 can be operated in expectation of this, that is, while expecting a so-called start-up. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  Further, in a variable effect in which a plurality of notice effects are performed, when a pattern corresponding to a rank of the degree of expectation to be a jackpot as a single notice effect pattern is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (“4” or “5”) is selected. After that, a part or all of the announcement effect (for example, the announcement effect by the cut-in 155) performed by operating the frame button 22 is not executed, or the operation is performed by operating the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated for a part or all of the preview effect, the preview effect is performed, but when the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the frame is displayed. Instead of or in addition to the execution of the announcement effect by operating the button 22, the announcement effect may be automatically performed when a predetermined time has come. Then, when determining the pattern of the preview effect performed automatically, a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview effect performed earlier may be deselected. . As a result, during the announcement performance with a high expectation of the jackpot, for example, while the super reach fluctuation is performed by the reach species with the high expectation of the jackpot, the notice production and the super reach fluctuation are performed. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the expectation of the jackpot may be further increased without lowering by the announcement effect automatically performed while the players are concentrated. Therefore, the player can further increase the sense of expectation to be a big hit, and can increase the interest in the game.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first to third embodiments, in the case where a plurality of announcement effects indicating a jackpot expectation degree are performed in one variation effect, when determining a certain announcement effect pattern, the same variation is applied. By unselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed earlier in the production, in multiple preview productions performed during the one variable production The configuration that prevents the expectation of the jackpot from being lowered after the expectation of the jackpot is indicated high has been described.

  On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of preview effects indicating a jackpot expectation are performed in one variable effect, only during the super-reach change, the supervising effect has By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement performance in the reach change, the super reach in the announcement production performed during the super reach change It is configured to prevent the expectation of the big hit from being lower than the expectation indicated by the reach species of the fluctuation.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration other than the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, the change setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the announcement effect process (S1909), and the announcement effect Various processes executed by each control device other than the rank determination process (S2135) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a super reach variation flag 223k is further provided in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113, as compared with the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

  The super-reach change flag 223k indicates that during the execution of the variable effect in which a plurality of announcement effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed, the super-reach change, which is a part of the variable effect, is started, and the super-reach change is performed. This flag indicates that the operation has been performed. If the super-reach change flag 223k is on during the execution of the variable effect in which a plurality of announcement effects indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot are performed, the super-reach change, which is a part of the variable effect, is started; Indicates that reach fluctuations are taking place. In addition, during the execution of the variable effect in which a plurality of announcement effects indicating the expectation of the jackpot are performed, if the super reach change flag 223k is off, the super reach change, which is a part of the variable effect, is not started, Indicates that the super reach fluctuation is not performed.

  The super-reach variation flag 223k is used to determine a detailed variation pattern based on the detailed variation pattern counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern table 222a when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. In this case, the MPU 221 temporarily turns off the notice effect flag 223c in accordance with the determined detailed variation pattern. Specifically, when the determined detailed variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the super reach change is performed in accordance with the setting of the notice effect flag 223c. The flag 223k is temporarily set to off.

  Then, the super reach change flag 223k is set to ON at a timing when a notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed at the start of the super reach change is performed. In addition, when the super reach change flag 223k is turned on, the rank of the pattern selected for the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, that is, at the timing when the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is performed, the determination rank counter is set. The value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b indicated by 223e is set to the second pointer 223f.

  If a super-reach change flag 223k is turned off when selecting a pattern in one notice effect, the pattern of the notice effect is performed without considering the pattern of the previous effect performed during the same change effect. , One pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks “1” to “5”. In other words, the notice effects (the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, and the notice effect of the super reach selection 153) executed before the start of the super-reach change are performed in the patterns corresponding to the ranks "1" to "5". Is selected from among the patterns. Therefore, in these announcement effects, it is permitted that the degree of expectation of a jackpot becomes lower than the degree of a predetermined rank after the degree of expectation of a predetermined rank or more is indicated as the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

  On the other hand, if the super-reach change flag 223k is on when selecting a pattern in one announcement effect, when selecting a pattern for an announcement effect performed thereafter, the patterns of the announcement effect are first to first. As in the third embodiment, a rank lower than the degree of expectation to become a jackpot indicated by a pattern determined for a preview effect performed earlier in a super reach change including a preview effect by the super reach selection 153 is included. Make the pattern unselected.

  By this, in a plurality of preview productions performed during one fluctuation production, when the super reach fluctuation is started, the expectation that the jackpot will be at least lower than the expectation indicated by the reach species of the super reach fluctuation. Can be prevented. Therefore, since it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation to the player while maintaining the degree of expectation indicated by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation at a minimum, the player, during the change of the super reach, sets the degree of expectation indicated by the reach type. By exhibiting a very low degree of expectation by the notice effect, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the change setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the change setting process (S1914). This fluctuation setting processing (S1914) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, similarly to the first embodiment, and the fluctuation setting processing of the first embodiment is performed. The same processing as that shown in FIG. 33 is performed.

  Specifically, of the fluctuation setting processing, the processing of S2101 to S2113 is the same as that of the first embodiment. Therefore, a detailed description of these processes is omitted. In the change setting process in the fifth embodiment, when the detailed change pattern determined in S2104 is determined to be the normal reach A or the super reach A performing the announcement effect by the process of S2109 (S2109: Yes), the first process is performed. After the processes of S2110 to S2113, which are the same as those of the embodiment, are performed, the super reach variation flag 223k is set to off (S4201), and the variation setting process ends.

  The processing of S2110 to S2113 and S4201 is performed when the normal reach A or the super reach A, which is a fluctuation pattern for executing a plurality of announcement effects, is determined as a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed in this fluctuation setting process. This is a process for initializing parameters for determining a pattern of each announcement effect executed in the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A. In this initialization process, by setting the super-reach variation flag 223k to OFF, the ranks “1” to “1” to “A” are set when the announcement effect pattern from the start of the variation effect to the execution of the super-reach variation is determined. One pattern can be selected from the patterns corresponding to “5”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, details of the announcement effect process (S1909) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the notice effect processing (S1909). This announcement effect process (S1909) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30). As described above, when the variable effect is performed by the normal reach A or the super reach A, the announcement effect is performed during the variable effect. Is a process for executing.

  Of the notice effect processing, the processing of S2131 to S2138 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, if it is determined in the processing of S2138 that it is the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154 at present (S2138: Yes), the super reach change flag 223k is set to ON (S4301), and the determination rank is further determined. The value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b indicated by the counter 223e is set to the second pointer 223f (S4302), and the process shifts to S2136.

  In the processing of S4302, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b set for the second pointer 223f, that is, the determination upper limit pointer corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at the execution timing of the notice effect by the character appearance 154 The value of 222b is the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to the rank of the reach type determined in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153.

  Therefore, the super reach variation flag 223k is set to ON by the processing of S4301, and the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is set to the second pointer 223f by the processing of S4302. Thus, in the announcement effect rank determination process (see FIG. 65), the announcement effect performed after the announcement effect by the character appearance 154 (the announcement effect by the cut-in 155) has at least the jackpot indicated by the reach type of the super reach variation. A pattern with a rank indicating an expected degree lower than the expected degree can be deselected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, details of the announcement effect rank determination processing (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the notice effect rank determination processing (S2135). The notice effect rank determination processing (S2135) is executed in the notice effect processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a processing for executing the notice effect pattern.

  Of the notice effect rank determination processing, the processing of S2140 to S2147 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. However, in the process of S2142, when the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the super reach change flag 223k is turned on. It is determined whether or not it is (S4401). If the super reach change flag 223k is on (S4401: Yes), the processes of S2145 to S2147 are performed as in the first embodiment, and the process returns to S2141 after the process of S2147.

  Further, in the process of S2142, when it is determined that the value A of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), or S2146. When the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is determined to be equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the same processing as in the first embodiment is performed. Next, after determining the rank of the pattern for performing the announcement effect to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143), it is determined whether the super reach variation flag 223k is on (S4402). Then, if the super reach change flag 223k is on (S4402: Yes), the same processing of S2144 as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Thus, when the super reach variation flag 223k is ON, that is, when the super reach variation is being performed, as in the first embodiment, when selecting a pattern in the announcement effect, the super reach variation flag 223k is not changed during the super reach variation. The pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined for the announcement effect performed on the second stage can be deselected. In addition, the value of the determination upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to the rank of the reach type determined in the notification effect by the super reach selection 153 is set to the second pointer 223f by the process of S4302 of the notification effect process of FIG. Therefore, due to the processing of S2145 and S2146, the notice effect (the notice effect by the cut-in 155) executed during the super-reach change becomes larger than the rank of the reach species determined in the notice effect by the super-reach selection 153. Patterns with ranks with low expectations are at least unselected.

  On the other hand, if the super reach change flag 223k is not on in the process of S4401 but is off (S4401: No), the process of S2145 and S2146 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2147. Thereby, irrespective of the rank of the notice effect performed so far, the value U of the determination upper limit pointer 222b and the value of the notice effect counter 223d are next determined for the rank of the degree of expectation at which the rank is the next lower jackpot. A is compared with A, and it is determined whether or not the rank is to be the rank of the pattern for performing the announcement effect. Thus, while the super reach change flag 223k is off, that is, the notice effect (the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, and the notice effect by the super reach selection 153) performed before the super reach change, the rank is “1”. One pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to .about. "5".

  Also, in the process of S4402, when the super reach change flag 223k is not on but is off (S4402: No), the process of S2144 is skipped, and the announcement effect rank determination process ends as it is.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of preview effects indicating a jackpot expectation degree are performed in one variable effect, only during the super reach change, A pattern having a rank lower than the expected jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement performance performed during the super reach fluctuation is not selected.

  As described above, with respect to a plurality of preview effects to be executed during one variable effect, each of the preview effect patterns, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 or when the preview effect is started, is separately performed. Is determined, a high rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in one announcement effect, and then a low rank jackpot expectation degree is shown in another announcement effect in the same variable effect. When this happens, the player realizes that despite having increased expectations for the jackpot once, it is actually less likely to be a jackpot, There is a risk that the interest in the game will be lost. In particular, the player generally tends to attach the most importance to the reach type of the super reach variation indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot, among the many announcement effects. In other words, the player is greatly delighted by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. In the announcement effect performed during the super-reach change, if the expectation that is lower than the jackpot indicated by the reach type of the super-reach change is indicated, the discourage of the player becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of preview effects indicating a jackpot expectation degree are performed in one variation effect, only during the super-reach variation, the pattern of the super reach variation is set as a certain announcement effect pattern. In the announcement production performed during the super-reach change, the reach type of the super-reach change is not selected because the pattern with the rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed earlier is not selected. Can be prevented from being lower than the expectation indicated by. Therefore, the expectation degree lower than the jackpot expected by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation is indicated by the notice effect performed during the super reach fluctuation, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being lost.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the pattern of the notice effect performed during the change in the super reach, the expectation degree that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the change of the super reach is determined. Since the lower rank pattern is not selected, the degree of expectation indicated by the pattern of the notice effect is maintained or higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the previous notice effect. Therefore, since the player watches the notice effect in expectation of the expectation of the jackpot becoming higher, the expectation of the jackpot can be improved as the variable effect proceeds. Further, in the present embodiment, in the preview effect performed during the change of the super reach (the preview effect by the cut-in 155), the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received any number of times during the frame button operation reception period, and every time the operation instruction is received. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined each time the cut-in image is displayed, and the expectation of the big hit is indicated to the player. Then, in the notice effect by the cut-in 155, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed before is not selected. It is possible to positively operate the frame button 22 in expectation of a higher degree of expectation. Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game, and can continue the game.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment has the same operational effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. be able to.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of preview effects indicating the jackpot expectation degree are performed in one fluctuation effect, only during the super-reach fluctuation, a certain notification effect pattern is used as a pattern in the super-reach fluctuation. Is configured such that a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the announcement effect performed in the announcement production is not selected, but the reach type of the super reach variation is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (for example, the rank “ (4) or (5)), only when the reach type shows the expected degree, the announcement effect pattern performed during the super-reach change is determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the super-reach change. A configuration may be adopted in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a hit of a given pattern is not selected. As a result, when the reach type having a reach rank or higher has developed into a super reach, a pattern of a predetermined rank or higher is selected in a notice effect at least during the change of the super reach. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the super reach fluctuation from being performed at least in the reach species having the rank equal to or higher than the predetermined rank, and to prevent the expectation to be the jackpot from being lowered in the subsequent announcement effect after the expectation to be the jackpot is high, People can be prevented from losing interest.

  The “third design” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” described in the claims, and the “fluctuation effect” described in the above embodiments is described in “ Dynamic display of identification information. "

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, a specific rank (for example, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is “4”) is supported in a preview effect performed before the super reach change such as the comment display 151 or the child character appearance 152 is developed. When a pattern that appears appears, in the subsequent super reach selection 153, the reach type corresponding to the specific rank (“thunder reach” in the above example) is selected as the reach type of the super reach variation, and a notice by the appearance of the character 154 is given. In the effect, a pattern in which a character (“thunder-like” in the above example) corresponding to the specific rank may appear may be selected. Also, if there is a fluctuation effect pattern that evolves from a super reach change to a special reach change that indicates that the jackpot probability is higher, a specific rank (for example, When a pattern corresponding to the jackpot expectation rank “4”) appears, the reach type corresponding to the specific rank is selected as the reach type of the special reach change, or displayed during the special reach change. A character corresponding to a specific rank may be selected as a character. Further, in a notice effect performed before the normal reach change (in this embodiment, a notice effect by the comment display 151), a pattern corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is “4”) appears. In this case, in a preview effect performed during the normal reach (a preview effect by the appearance of the child character 152), a pattern corresponding to the specific rank may be selected. As a result, if the expectation of a specific rank (a rank with a high jackpot expectation) is indicated at an early stage in the notice effect, the reach type of the super reach variation (or the special reach variation) or the super reach variation ( Alternatively, in a notice effect (a character appearing during a super-reach change, a normal-reach change, or a special-reach change) performed in a normal-reach change or a special-reach change, at least the expectation of a specific rank can be secured and indicated. In this case, further, during the super-reach change (or during the normal reach change or the special reach change), a notice effect (for example, by the cut-in 155) performed based on the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. A notice effect may not be performed. As a result, when the expected level of a specific rank (a rank with a high jackpot expectation) is indicated at an early stage in the notice effect, the super reach fluctuation (or the normal reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation) corresponding to the specific rank is indicated. ), And while the super reach (or the normal reach or the special reach) corresponding to the specific rank is performed, the announcement effect performed based on the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is not executed. It is possible to concentrate the player's interest on the super reach fluctuation (or the normal reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation) corresponding to the specific rank. Therefore, the player can further increase the sense of expectation for the jackpot. In this case, during the super reach change (or during the normal reach change or the special reach change), one or more preview effects are automatically performed, and the expectation to be a big hit in the preview effect is not reduced. Then, the pattern may be determined so that the rank of the expectation level of the jackpot is maintained or increases. This makes it possible to show the player that the degree of expectation to become a jackpot is automatically increased during the change of the super reach (or the change of the normal reach or the change of the special reach), thereby further enhancing the interest of the player. Can be.

  In each of the above embodiments, when determining the pattern of the announcement effect, non-selecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the announcement effect performed earlier in the same variable effect However, instead of this, a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of being a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice effect, for the notice effect performed after a certain notice effect, May be configured not to be selected. For example, except for the comment display 151 and the notice effect produced by the appearance of the child character 152, a notice effect performed after the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (in each of the above embodiments, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 and the cut-in 155 In the notice effect (if the event is performed multiple times, all of the notice effects)), the rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect A configuration in which a pattern is not selected may be adopted. In addition, if there is a fluctuation effect pattern that evolves from a super reach change to a special reach change indicating that the jackpot probability is higher, the same effect is given in the notice effect performed after the notice effect that selects the reach type of the special reach. It is good also as a structure which does not select the pattern of a rank lower than the expectation which becomes the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed previously among the variable effects. In addition, in a notice effect performed after the normal reach change, a pattern with a rank lower than an expectation level which is a jackpot of a pattern determined in a notice effect performed earlier in the same change effect is not selected. It may be configured. As a result, when the system reaches a super reach (or a special reach or normal reach), at least during the change of the super reach (or during the change of the special reach or during the change of the normal reach) , After the expected level of jackpot of one rank is shown in a certain announcement production, in the subsequent announcement production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank, or the expectation degree of bigger than that one rank The pattern corresponding to the higher rank is selected. Therefore, in the announcement performance performed during the super reach change (or during the special reach change or the normal reach change) in which the expectation of the jackpot increases, the expectation of the jackpot is increased, and then the expectation of the jackpot is increased. Since it is possible to prevent the degree from being lowered, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted.

  Alternatively, in a case where a reach type (“thunder reach”) corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is “4”) is selected in the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, As long as the notice effect to be executed thereafter, that is, the notice effect by the cut-in 155 (if the notice effect is performed a plurality of times, all of the notice effects), it is determined by the notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of a given pattern is not selected. In addition, in the notice production for selecting the reach type of the special reach, the advance notice to be executed only when the reach type corresponding to the specific rank (for example, the rank of the jackpot expectation degree is “4”) is selected. In the effect, a configuration may be adopted in which a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect is not selected. In addition, in the first announcement effect performed during the normal reach, only when a pattern corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit is “4”) is selected, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of a pattern determined in a preview effect performed earlier in the same variable effect is not selected. As a result, if the reach species of a specific rank has developed into a super reach or a special reach, or if a special rank pattern has been announced in the normal reach, at least during the change of the super reach or the special reach, or During normal reach fluctuations, patterns with a specific rank or higher are selected in the announcement performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the expectation of the jackpot in the subsequent announcement performance after the super reach fluctuation is performed at least in the reach species according to the specific rank and the expectation of the jackpot is indicated high, and the player is interested. Can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned a first predetermined number from “0” to a rank having the highest expectation of a jackpot, and a second predetermined number from the next value. However, the value of “99” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest expectation degree of jackpot, and is assigned to the rank with the second highest expectation degree of jackpot. When selecting one of the five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of the counter 223d, a pointer giving the upper limit value of the judgment for the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern The judgment upper limit pointer 222b is prepared, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is set to the judgment upper limit pointer b, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the notice effect pattern, and the judgment upper limit pointer is determined. If the value of 222b is set to the second pointer 223f, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is larger than the upper limit pointer 222b, and if the upper limit pointer 222b of the determined rank matches the second pointer 223f, The lower rank was not determined, and the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time was determined as the pattern for the announcement effect. On the other hand, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned a first predetermined number from “99”, and is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation of a jackpot, and the second predetermined number is assigned a big hit from the next value. Is assigned to the rank having the second highest expectation, and the value “0” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” having the lowest expectation to be a jackpot. When selecting one pattern from among the five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value, the lower limit of the judgment is used as a pointer for giving the lower limit value of the judgment to the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern. A value pointer is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the notice effect counter 223d is greater than or equal to the determination lower limit value pointer in order from the highest rank of the expected value which is a big hit. If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or greater than the judgment lower limit pointer, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the notice effect pattern, and the value of the judgment lower limit pointer is set to the second pointer 223f; If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is smaller than the lower limit pointer, and the lower limit pointer of the determined rank matches the second pointer 223f, the lower rank is not determined and the current lower rank pointer is not determined. A pattern corresponding to the rank may be determined as a pattern for the announcement effect. This also provides the same effects as the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned a first predetermined number from “0” to a rank having the highest expectation of a jackpot, and a second predetermined number from the next value. However, the value of “99” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest expectation degree of jackpot, and is assigned to the rank with the second highest expectation degree of jackpot. When selecting one of the five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of the counter 223d, a pointer giving the upper limit value of the judgment for the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern The judgment upper limit pointer 222b is prepared, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d is set to the judgment upper limit pointer b, and if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the notice effect pattern, and the judgment upper limit pointer is determined. The case where the value of 222b is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and thereafter, the notice effect counter 223d is updated in a range from 0 to the value of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h has been described. Instead, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned a first predetermined number from “99”, and is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation of jackpot, and the second predetermined number is assigned from the next value. The jackpot expectation degree is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value “0” of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank “1” with the lowest jackpot expectation degree. When selecting one pattern from among the five patterns prepared for the notice effect based on the value of the notice effect, the judgment is performed as a pointer that gives the lower limit value of the judgment for the value of the notice effect counter 223d for each pattern. A lower limit pointer is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or larger than the determination lower limit pointer in order from the highest expected value of the jackpot. If the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or larger than the lower limit judgment value pointer, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the notice effect pattern, and the value of the judgment lower limit pointer is stored in the notice effect counter minimum value memory. After that, the notice effect counter 223d may be updated in a range from the value of the notice effect counter minimum value memory to 99. This also provides the same effect as the second embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the second pointer 223f is provided, and when selecting one pattern from the five patterns prepared for the notice effect, the notice effect is set in descending order of the expected value of the jackpot. If the value of the counter 223d is equal to or smaller than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the announcement effect pattern, and the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b is set to the second pointer 223f. When the value of the effect counter 223d is larger than the determination upper limit pointer 222b, and when the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the determined rank matches the second pointer 223f, the lower rank is not determined and the current time is determined. The pattern corresponding to the rank of was decided as the pattern of the notice production. On the other hand, a judgment rank memory is provided, and when one pattern is selected from the five patterns prepared for the notice effect, the value of the notice effect counter 223d is determined in order from the rank of the expected value which becomes the big hit. Is equal to or smaller than the determination upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the announcement effect, the rank at that time is set in the determination rank memory, and the value of the announcement effect counter 223d is set to the determination upper limit value. If the determined rank matches the rank stored in the determination rank memory when the pointer is larger than the pointer 222b, the lower rank is not determined and the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is changed to a preview effect pattern. May be determined. Also, instead of the second pointer 223f and the judgment rank memory, separate flags are provided corresponding to the judgment upper limit pointers 222b corresponding to the respective ranks, and each flag is normally set to off, so that the When selecting one pattern from the five prepared patterns, if the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or smaller than the determination upper limit pointer 222b in order from the rank of the expected value which becomes the big hit, the rank at that time is determined. The corresponding pattern is determined as the announcement effect pattern, the flag corresponding to the determination upper limit pointer 222b of the rank is set to ON, and the determination is made when the value of the advance effect counter 223d is larger than the determination upper limit pointer 222b. When the flag corresponding to the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b is on, Without performing the determination of the link may be determined a pattern corresponding to the rank of that time as a pattern of announcement attraction. These also provide the same effects as in the first embodiment.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of preview effects indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot are performed in one variable effect, only when the expectation degree of the jackpot in a certain notice effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank, the subsequent As a preview production pattern, a non-selection of a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed earlier in the same fluctuation production is not selected, In the plurality of announcement effects performed in the first embodiment, after the expectation degree of the predetermined rank or more is indicated as the expectation degree of the jackpot, the expectation degree of the jackpot is prevented from being lower than the predetermined rank in the first embodiment. That is, when the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the pattern of the notice effect, the same variable effect Is applied to expectations low rank pattern than as a jackpot pattern determined in informational display performed before the configuration of the non-selected, not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case of performing a plurality of announcement effects indicating the expectation of a jackpot in one variable effect, only when the expectation degree of a jackpot in a certain announcement effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank, as a subsequent announcement effect pattern In the same variable production, by selecting non-selected patterns with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the preview production performed earlier, a plurality of patterns performed during one variable production In the notice effect, after the expectation of the predetermined rank or more is indicated as the expectation of the jackpot, the configuration of preventing the expectation of the jackpot from becoming lower than the predetermined rank is configured in the second embodiment, that is, The announcement effect counter maximum value memory 223h is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 instead of the second pointer 223f, and the announcement effect counter maximum value is provided. When the pattern of the notice effect is determined by changing the update range of the notice effect counter 223d by the moly 223h, it is expected that the pattern determined in the notice effect performed earlier in the same variable effect will be a big hit. It is also possible to adapt to a configuration in which a pattern with a rank lower than the degree is not selected, and to the configuration of the third embodiment, that is, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, the determination upper limit pointer 222b Instead, a rank determination table 222c is provided, and a determination rank memory 223i is provided in the RAM 223 without providing the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the notification effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and the pattern of the notification effect is determined. In the same fluctuating production, the pattern determined in the previous production Of course applicable also to the configuration that is the expectation low rank pattern than as a down jackpot unselected.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of preview effects indicating the jackpot expectation degree are performed in one fluctuation effect, only during the super-reach fluctuation, as a certain notification effect pattern, By not selecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice production performed, the expectation indicated by the reach species of the super reach change in the notice production performed during the super reach change In the configuration of the first embodiment, the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 to determine the pattern of the announcement effect, in order to prevent the expectation that the big hit becomes lower than the degree. In the case of the same fluctuation production, the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement production performed earlier in the same fluctuation production Was applied to the configuration of the non-selected pattern of rank it has, but not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case of performing a plurality of preview productions indicating a jackpot expectation in one fluctuation production, only during the super-reach fluctuation, as a certain preliminary production pattern, a preview production performed earlier in the super-reach fluctuation. By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the above, in the announcement production performed during the super reach change, the jackpot is greater than the expected degree indicated by the reach species of the super reach change The configuration for preventing the expected degree from becoming low is changed to the configuration of the second embodiment, that is, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h instead of the second pointer 223f, and the notice is given. By changing the update range of the notice effect counter 223d by the effect counter maximum value memory 223h, When determining the pattern of the appearance, the configuration in which the pattern with a rank lower than the expectation that becomes the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous announcement production in the same variable production is not selected The configuration of the third embodiment, that is, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 is provided with a rank determination table 222c in place of the determination upper limit pointer 222b, and the RAM 223 is provided with a determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, but the judgment rank memory 223i is provided to determine the notice effect pattern. For a configuration where patterns with ranks lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the production are deselected Even as a matter of course applicable.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the variable effect is performed in a variable mode including a preview effect performed when the frame button 22 is operated and a preview effect automatically performed at a predetermined timing, A case has been described in which a pattern (that is, a rank of the degree of expectation to be a big hit shown in the notice effect) is determined separately for the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the case where the variable effect is executed in a variation mode in which only the announcement effect executed when there is a plurality of times, or in the variation mode in which only the announcement effect automatically executed at a predetermined timing is executed multiple times Even in the case where an effect is executed, a pattern (that is, a rank of the degree of expectation to be a jackpot shown in the notice effect) is determined separately for each notice effect. Temoi.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when various announcement effects are performed by the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155 during the variable effect, the respective advance effects are performed in advance. The configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the announced announcement performance is not selected has been described. On the other hand, in the step-up notice in which the degree of expectation increases each time the appearing image changes (step-up), when the frame button 22 is operated, the image is step-up changed. In the case where it is configured to determine whether or not the pattern is determined, similarly to the above embodiments, when stepping up in each step, the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed step is Alternatively, a configuration in which a low-rank pattern is not selected may be applied. In addition, each time the frame button 22 is instructed by the player to perform an operation, the effect of displaying the jackpot expectation degree with the number of star symbols or a number such as a percentage is displayed in the same manner as in the above embodiments. In the above, a configuration may be applied in which a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed effect is not selected. Thereby, the same effects as those of the above embodiments can also be obtained for the step-up notice and the effect of displaying the expectation to be a big hit by a number each time the frame button 22 is operated by the player. .

  In the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, the determination as to whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is performed by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident Whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused may be confirmed. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237 is checked to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, if transfer data information other than Null data exists at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the MPU 231 operates in accordance with the character data 234 according to the transfer data information. , The process of reading image data from and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is necessary for the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but shares the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM, and each video RAM may be managed. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to the controller 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive nonvolatile storage means, such as a hard disk, is used. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed. However, by using the configuration described in each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 can display an image at a desired time without any problem. Can be done.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 stores the first program storage area in the area. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiments, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the buffer RAM 234c. The case has been described in which after setting, data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 634c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The internal bus (MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to each other). It may be directly connected to the bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, May be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. A port type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the possibility that drawing processing is delayed by writing image data can be suppressed.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, in response to a reception command received from the main control device 101 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made at least resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and resident, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. It may be transferred. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten while the power is turned on and the content of the resident video RAM 235 is maintained is not limited to this. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the 113. Is also good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave. Also, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 at the time of turning on the power, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the MPU 231 starts execution of the display main process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be reduced, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. The transfer can be efficiently performed without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiments, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a via the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring the image data to the 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image. Image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. . Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the fluctuating effect is not being executed, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command is generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the back image change command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound ramp control device 113 grasps the game state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with a change in the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the reach type of the super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and change the rear image or the reach type of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the reach type after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident area using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the like. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data table, the transfer data is transferred so that the new back image is stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the table may be defined, or transferred so that a new rear image is stored in an area different from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the data table may be defined. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110, Main controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command notifying the error from main controller 110 to either sound lamp controller 113 or display controller 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 44). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 46 (b)) may be executed when it is determined that the warning symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is It may be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command for notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident. The display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 when receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 218 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Thereby, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image which notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 425 is the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which, as the additional data table, a drawing content for additionally displaying the preview effect in the third effect display device 81 in the variable effect is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. In addition, the additional data table is for drawing various effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. May be defined. Further, in the additional data table, with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110, the drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image which is not normally displayed is added. Instead of or in addition to specifying such drawing contents, the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of some or all of the one production, and the display in one production The drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image to be displayed may be predetermined.

  When the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by an additional data table, an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the additional data table. In correspondence with an address expressed in units of time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment), a type of a sprite whose color tone is to be changed and color information for specifying a changed color tone in the sprite at that time. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image displayed in one effect is defined by an additional data table, the additional data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 sets, at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described. In addition, an additional transfer data table which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared. May be. In this additional transfer data table, a sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table in correspondence with the address specified in the additional data table (or the display data table) and whose transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address is specified. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, for example, in each of the above-described embodiments, an additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281, and when one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table Apart from the corresponding transfer data table, an additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. If the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. It may be.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 before using the image data in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect specified by the additional data table can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, it is possible to transfer necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of an image based on the additional data table. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , "Frequency start-up", "High-speed fluctuating", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach fluctuating", "Super-reach fluctuating", and prepare a display data table for each element. After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is created. You may make it generate | occur | produce. In many cases, a display common to the respective fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach change”, and the like. Thus, by making the variable effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233g to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). As described above, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the image for one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval). Therefore, the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image developed first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, The buffer may be alternately selected, and the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed and the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 is controlled via the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d with the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a variation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and stop and display the third symbol including the main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a third design including a main design with a number or a main design without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, after the power is turned on, the display control means 314 first stores the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 into the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image. After the transfer, the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 314 transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image can be performed more quickly.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, The case where the information of the image data to be transferred at the time (transferred data information) is specified has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 becomes 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display content at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, instead of indicating the sprite type itself as the sprite type to be drawn defined at predetermined time intervals, image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. The address of the character ROM 234 may be defined. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Therefore, it is not necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the stored image determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiments, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image determination flag 233j. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is stored. May be. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but is not necessarily limited thereto. Alternatively, image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Times can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. It may be. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Is also good. In addition, as the back image, not only the one that scrolls and the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears over time instead of such a back image is displayed. It may move or change.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which one first entrance 64 is provided in the game board 13 where a jackpot lottery is started when a ball enters, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrance holes from which an entrance ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged on the game board 13. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first entrances, the reserved ball count command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 indicates which first entrance is being held. Information may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first entered ball indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the reserved ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance indicated in the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the first entrance is changed. The number of reserved balls can be counted every time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is reduced by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33) when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted according to the setting of the variation pattern command by the variation start process (S1207). The value of the counter 203a (N) (see S1205 in FIG. 23) is set so that the main control device 110 transmits the command to the sound ramp control device 113. The command may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2107 in FIG. 33 is omitted. When the value (N) of the deferred ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110 is transmitted, the detained ball number command includes information indicating that the decremented ball number has been subtracted (that is, the starting winning prize). The information may indicate that the command is not the number of retained balls added according to (1), and the number of retained balls command may be generated without including the values of various counters acquired with the start winning.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and a display instruction is given from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a notice effect such as a notice effect command or an error occurrence command generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 is used instead. Various flags such as an execution flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and a display data table, a transfer data table, and an additional data table are set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table buffer 233f, and the additional data table buffer 233e based on the flags. Or various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is changed by a number in the part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four by the reserved ball number. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as described in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.

  Acquiring means for acquiring random information in response to establishment of a predetermined starting condition; and selecting means for selecting a first effect mode which is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquiring means. A main control means having a first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the first effect mode selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. Control means for providing a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. The control means executes a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect a plurality of times during the execution of the first effect by the first effect executing means. Second production execution means Selecting means for selecting, for each second effect, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect executing means, wherein the selecting means selects one of the second effects When selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed during the same first effect prior to the second effect Is a non-selected gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, based on the information acquired by the acquisition means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, the first presentation mode, which is dynamic display of identification information, is selected by the selection means. Selected. Then, in the sub control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed as the first effect by the first effect execution means in the selected mode. When predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. In addition, in the sub-control means, during execution of the first effect by the first effect execution means, a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that predetermined identification information appears in the first effect is executed by the second effect execution. Performed multiple times by means. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is selected by the selecting means for each second effect. Then, in this selecting means, when the degree of expectation shown in the second effect is selected for one second effect, it is executed during the same first effect before the second effect. In this case, the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the second effect is not selected. Thereby, during one first effect, after a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in a certain second effect, in the subsequent second effect, the degree of expectation is the same as the predetermined degree of expectation or higher. Degree can be shown. Therefore, in a plurality of second effects performed in one first effect, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears from appearing high, and to prevent the degree of expectation from lowering. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the expected degree of winning in each second effect unit executed during one first effect, while preventing the player from being distracted.

  In the gaming machine A1, the game machine A1 includes operation means operated by a player, and the second effect execution means includes a third effect for each of one or more second effects among the plurality of second effects. The operation means is executed in response to an operation performed by a player, and the selection means displays the degree of expectation indicated by the third effect with respect to the third effect. A gaming machine A2, which is selected in response to an operation by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, for the third effect executed by the second effect executing means in response to the operation of the operating means by the player, the degree of expectation indicated by the third effect is determined by the operation means of the player. The selection is made by the selection means in response to the operation. Even in the case of such a configuration, after a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in a certain second effect (including the third effect) during one first effect, the second effect is thereafter performed. (Including the third effect), it is possible to indicate the same degree of expectation as the predetermined degree of expectation or a higher degree of expectation. This allows the player to positively operate the operation means while expecting the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears to increase. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine A2, the second effect execution means executes a fourth effect other than the third effect among the plurality of second effects at a predetermined timing, respectively. The selecting means, when the third effect is executed by the second effect executing means before the fourth effect in the fourth effect, expects the third effect. A gaming machine A3, wherein after selecting a degree, an expectation degree indicated by the fourth effect is selected for the one fourth effect.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2. That is, among the plurality of second effects, a fourth effect other than the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player is executed by the second effect execution means at a predetermined timing. Then, in one of the fourth effects, when the third effect is executed by the second effect execution means before the fourth effect, the degree of expectation for the third effect is selected. Later, for the one fourth effect, the degree of expectation indicated by the fourth effect is selected by the selection means. Thereby, even if the third effect performed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player is performed before the fourth effect, the predetermined degree of expectation in the third effect is achieved. After the selection, in the subsequent fourth effect, the degree of expectation lower than the predetermined degree of expectation selected in the third effect can be easily and reliably non-selected. Therefore, during the first effect, after a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated in the third effect performed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player, in the subsequent fourth effect, the predetermined degree of expectation is displayed. There is an effect that the degree of expectation equal to or higher than the degree can be easily and reliably selected and indicated.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the fourth effect is executed by the second effect executing means at a predetermined timing with respect to one of the fourth effects, an expectation indicated by the fourth effect is displayed. A gaming machine A4 characterized by selecting a degree.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, when the fourth effect is executed by the second effect executing means at a predetermined timing for one fourth effect, the degree of expectation indicated by the fourth effect is selected by the selecting means. Accordingly, even when the third effect is executed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player before the fourth effect, the degree of expectation for the third effect is determined. Even if it is not known whether or not is selected, after a predetermined degree of expectation is selected in the third effect, in the subsequent fourth effect, selection in the third effect is easier and more reliable. An expected degree lower than the predetermined expected degree can be deselected. Therefore, during the first effect, after a predetermined degree of expectation is indicated in the third effect performed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player, in the subsequent fourth effect, the predetermined degree of expectation is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to more easily and reliably select and indicate the same degree of expectation or a higher degree of expectation.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the selecting unit may display the degrees of expectation indicated by the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect executing unit in the order in which the second effects are executed. 2. A gaming machine A5, which is selected for each effect of 2.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, the degree of expectation indicated by the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect executing means is selected by the selecting means for each second effect in the order in which the second effects are executed. Thereby, when the expectation degree shown in the second effect is selected for one second effect, the second effect executed during the same first effect before the second effect is selected. There is an effect that the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the effect can be easily deselected.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the plurality of second effects each indicate an expectation degree at which the predetermined identification information appears in a plurality of ranks, and the selecting unit sets a predetermined time. Each time a counter is updated within a predetermined range, and a predetermined range in which the counter is updated in association with a plurality of ranks of the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect is divided into boundary values for each rank. The boundary value defining means to be defined, and, in order from the rank having the highest degree of expectation, a second value based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the rank and the value of the counter. A determination means for determining whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation indicated by the effect, and when the judgment means determines that a predetermined rank is to be selected as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, Predetermined rank Information related to the rank information storage means, the rank information storage control means, and the determination means, in order from the rank with the highest expectation, in order from the boundary value defined by the boundary value definition means in association with the rank In the process of determining whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect based on the value of the counter, the rank to be determined is the predetermined rank stored in the rank storage means. A game machine B1 comprising: a game machine B1 for canceling the judgment by the judgment means and selecting a predetermined rank as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5. That is, the selection means includes a counter that is updated within a predetermined range every predetermined time and a predetermined range in which the counter is updated in association with the ranks of a plurality of degrees of expectation indicated by the second effect. And boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value for each rank. Then, based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the rank and the value of the counter, in order from the rank having the highest degree of expectation, as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect, The determination means determines whether or not to select the rank. If the determination means determines that the predetermined rank is to be selected as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, information on the predetermined rank is determined. The information is stored in the rank information storage means by the information storage control means. On the other hand, the determination means indicates, in order from the rank having the highest degree of expectation, one second effect based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the rank and the value of the counter. As a degree of expectation, in the process of determining whether or not to select the rank, if the rank to be determined is the predetermined rank stored in the rank storage means, the determination by the determination means is terminated by the discontinuation means, A predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect. Thus, when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second production, a rank lower than that rank is not selected for a second production to be executed later in the same first production. It can be. In addition, this non-selection can be realized without changing the boundary value used by the determination means while using the same boundary value. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store a large number of boundary values, while a capacity required for storing the boundary values is suppressed, when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, the same level is determined. There is an effect that a rank lower than that rank can be deselected with respect to a second effect that is executed later in the first effect.

  In the gaming machine B1, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the rank information storage control means determines that the predetermined degree of identification information appears in the lowest expected degree. A gaming machine B2 wherein information is stored in the rank information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the rank information storage means stores information on the rank with the lowest degree of expectation in which the predetermined identification information appears in the rank information storage control. Stored by the means. Thus, there is an effect that the degree of expectation selected for the second effect that is executed first after the first effect is started can be selected including the degree of expectation of the lowest rank. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, each of the plurality of second effects indicates an expected degree at which the predetermined identification information appears in a plurality of ranks, and the selecting unit includes a counter and a counter. Updating means for updating the counter within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of expected degrees indicated by the second effect in association with the rank of the expected degree. When the predetermined range to be updated is divided, the boundary value defining unit that defines the boundary value for each rank, and the boundary value defining unit that defines the boundary value in association with the rank in descending order of the degree of expectation in association with the rank. Based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, a determination unit that determines whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect, and one second second determination Directing When it is determined that a predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation, a boundary value storage control unit that stores information related to the boundary value defined by the boundary value specification unit in the boundary value storage unit in association with the predetermined rank. The update unit includes a predetermined range based on a boundary value corresponding to the predetermined rank stored in the boundary value storage unit, excluding a range associated with a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the predetermined rank. A gaming machine C1 wherein the counter is updated within the game machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are obtained. That is, the selecting means includes a counter, an updating means for updating the counter within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of expected degrees indicated by the second effect. Boundary value defining means is provided for defining a boundary value for each rank when a predetermined range in which the counter is updated is divided in ascending or descending order. Then, based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means associated with the rank and the value of the counter, in order from the rank having the highest expectation, as the expectation indicated by one second effect, The determination means determines whether or not to select the rank, and when the determination means determines that the predetermined rank is to be selected as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, the determination is made in association with the predetermined rank. Information about the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining unit is stored in the boundary value storage unit by the boundary value storage control unit. Then, based on the boundary value corresponding to the predetermined rank stored in the boundary value storage means, the counter updates the counter within a predetermined range excluding a range associated with a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the predetermined rank by the updating means. Will be updated. Since the update range of the counter is changed in this way, a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while using the same boundary value without changing the boundary value used by the determination means. Each time, a rank lower than that rank can be deselected in a second performance subsequently executed in the same first performance. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store a large number of boundary values, while a capacity required for storing the boundary values is suppressed, when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, the same level is determined. There is an effect that a rank lower than that rank can be deselected with respect to a second effect that is executed later in the first effect.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the first effect is started by the first effect executing means, the boundary value storage control means sets the rank having the lowest degree of expectation for the predetermined identification information to appear. A gaming machine C2 wherein information relating to a boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means in association with the boundary value is stored in a boundary value storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the boundary value storage control means associates the boundary value with the rank having the lowest expectation for the appearance of the predetermined identification information. Information on the boundary value defined by the defining means is stored in the boundary value storage means. Thus, the counter can be updated over the entire predetermined range from when the first effect is started to when at least the degree of expectation indicated in the second effect is selected for the first second effect. . Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of expectation selected for the second effect executed first after the first effect is started can be selected including the degree of expectation of the lowest rank.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the selection unit may include a counter updated within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, a rank of a plurality of expectations and a value of the counter that can be indicated by the second effect. Storage means for storing information indicating the relationship, determination means for determining a rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect from the value of the counter based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means And a rank storage control means for storing information on the rank determined by the above in the rank storage means, wherein the storage means has a higher degree of expectation than a predetermined rank among the ranks of the degree of expectation that can be indicated by the second effect. A first storage unit for storing information indicating a relationship with the value of the counter with respect to a rank excluding a low rank, wherein the determination unit stores information on the predetermined rank in the rank storage unit; If stored, the first based on the information stored in the storage unit, the gaming machine and determines the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the second rendition from the value of one of the counter D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are obtained. That is, the selection means includes a counter that is updated within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, and storage means that stores information indicating a relationship between a rank of a plurality of expectations and a value of the counter that can be indicated by the second effect. Are provided. Then, based on the information stored in the storage unit, the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect is determined by the determination unit from the value of the counter. Then, the information on the rank determined by the determination means is stored in the rank storage means by the rank storage control means. Here, the storage means stores information indicating the relationship between the counter value and the ranks excluding the ranks lower than the predetermined rank among the ranks of the degree of expectation that can be indicated by the second effect. When the information relating to the predetermined rank is stored in the rank storage means, the first storage means performs one second from the counter value based on the information stored in the first storage means. The rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the effect is determined by the determining means. Thus, when the predetermined rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second production, in the second production executed subsequently in the same first production, a rank lower than the predetermined production rank is set to non-existence. There is an effect that it can be selected. In addition, by providing the first storage unit, it is possible to finely set the probability of being selected for each rank having an expected degree equal to or higher than the predetermined rank while not selecting a rank having a lower expected degree than the predetermined rank. effective.

  In the gaming machine D1, the storage means includes second storage means for storing information indicating a relationship with the value of the counter for all ranks of the degree of expectation that can be indicated by the second effect. When the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the storage control means stores, in the rank information storage means, information on the rank having the lowest degree of expectation that predetermined identification information appears. When the information regarding the rank with the lowest expected degree is stored in the rank storage unit, the determination unit determines the value of the counter based on the information stored in the second storage unit. A gaming machine D2 for determining a rank of the degree of expectation indicated by one second effect.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, the storage unit includes a second storage unit that stores information indicating the relationship between the counter value and the rank of all the degrees of expectation that can be indicated by the second effect. Further, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the information on the rank with the lowest expectation at which the predetermined identification information appears appears is stored in the rank information storage means by the rank information storage control means. Is stored. Then, when the information relating to the rank with the lowest expectation is stored in the rank storage means, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the expectation degree indicated by the second effect from the counter value is displayed. Is determined by the determining means. Thus, there is an effect that the degree of expectation selected for the second effect that is executed first after the first effect is started can be selected including the degree of expectation of the lowest rank. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, and D2, the gaming machine includes an operation unit operated by a player and an operation reception unit that receives an operation of the operation unit by the player. Wherein the second effect execution means is configured such that, for at least one second effect among the plurality of second effects, the operation accepting means receives an operation of the operation means during a predetermined period. The repetition is executed as a fifth effect, and the selecting means selects the degree of expectation shown in the fifth effect for each fifth effect, and selects the degree of expectation for one fifth effect. When selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the fifth effect, non-selecting the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the fifth effect executed during the predetermined period before the fifth effect. A gaming machine E1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, and D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, for at least one second effect among the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect execution means, every time an operation of the operation means is received by the operation reception means during a predetermined period, the fifth operation is performed. It is repeatedly executed as an effect. The degree of expectation shown in the fifth effect is selected by the selecting means for each fifth effect. Also, when selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the fifth effect for one fifth effect, the expectation indicated by the fifth effect executed during the predetermined period before the fifth effect is selected. The degree of expectation lower than the degree is not selected, and is made non-selected by the selection means. Thus, when the operating means is operated during the predetermined period and the fifth effect is repeatedly executed, the degree of expectation indicated in one fifth effect is changed in the fifth effect executed earlier than the fifth effect. There is an effect that an expected degree lower than the indicated expected degree can be suppressed. In addition, this allows the player to expect the degree of expectation indicated by the fifth effect to increase, and to encourage the player to repeatedly operate the operation means. There is an effect that the willingness to participate can be improved.

  Acquiring means for acquiring random information in response to establishment of a predetermined starting condition; and selecting means for selecting a first effect mode which is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquiring means. A main control means having a first effect execution means for executing the first effect based on the first effect mode selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. Control means for providing a predetermined game value to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. The sub-control means is operated each time the operation of the operation means is received by the operation reception means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first effect by the first effect execution means. Second effect execution means for repeatedly executing a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect, and the second effect executed by the second effect execution means And selecting means for selecting the degree of expectation indicated by each time the second effect is executed, wherein the selecting means selects the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect when the second effect is selected. A gaming machine E2 wherein an expectation lower than the expectation shown in the second effect executed during the predetermined period before the effect is not selected.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in the main control means, based on the information acquired by the acquisition means triggered by the establishment of the predetermined starting condition, the first presentation mode, which is dynamic display of identification information, is selected by the selection means. Selected. Then, in the sub control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed as the first effect by the first effect execution means in the selected mode. When predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Further, in the sub-control means, every time an operation of the operating means is received by the operation receiving means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first effect by the first effect execution means, the predetermined identification information is generated in the first effect. A second effect indicating the expected degree of appearance is repeatedly executed by the second effect executing means. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is selected by the selecting means every time each second effect is executed. Then, in this selecting means, when selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect for one second effect, the second effect executed during the predetermined period before the second effect is selected. Expectations lower than the expectations shown in the performance are not selected. Thereby, during one first effect, after a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in a certain second effect, in the subsequent second effect, the degree of expectation is the same as the predetermined degree of expectation or higher. Degree can be shown. Therefore, in a plurality of second effects performed in one first effect, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears from appearing high, and to prevent the degree of expectation from lowering. In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to determine the expected degree of winning in each second effect unit repeatedly executed during the first effect while preventing the player from being distracted. In addition, this allows the player to expect the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect to increase, and to encourage the player to repeatedly operate the operation means. There is an effect that the willingness to participate can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, an operation means operated by a player is provided, and the first effect is such that the predetermined identification information is The first stage is configured to have a first period suggesting that the second stage is performed, and the second stage is performed in accordance with the first period and a sixth stage performed by the player during the first period. And a seventh effect performed when the operation means is operated. In the second effect performed before the first period, the selecting means selects a specific rank by the selecting means. When the degree of expectation is selected, the specific rank is selected as the degree of expectation shown in the sixth effect, and the sub-control unit executes the second rank executed before the first period. In the production, a specific rank If Machido is selected, the gaming machine F1, characterized in that the non-execution of effect of the seventh.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, and E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second production performed before the first period suggesting that the predetermined identification information appears in the first production, when the expectation degree of the specific rank is selected by the selection unit, The specific rank is selected by the selection unit as the degree of expectation shown in the sixth effect, which is the second effect executed in accordance with the first period. Also, in this case, even if the player operates the operation means during the first period, the seventh effect to be executed by the operation is not executed. Thereby, when the expectation of the specific rank is indicated by the second effect as the expectation at which the predetermined identification information appears in the early stage before the first period, during the first period, the expectation of the specific rank is specified. The player can concentrate on the sixth effect indicating the expectation of the rank. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player can be further increased.

  In the gaming machine F1, the second effect includes an eighth effect automatically executed during the first period, and the selecting unit selects the second effect executed before the first period. If the expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selecting means, a rank having a lower expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is not selected as the expectation indicated in the eighth effect. A gaming machine F2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, in the second effect performed before the first period, when the degree of expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selection unit, the expectation indicated in the eighth effect automatically executed during the first period. As a degree, a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is not selected by the selection means. Thus, in the eighth effect, the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information is not indicated lower than the specific rank, and the expected degree is maintained or indicated higher. Therefore, during the first period, the player can show the player an appearance that the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information is increased by the eighth effect, so that the interest of the player can be further enhanced. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2, the selecting means may include an expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree in one second effect. Is selected, when the degree of expectation shown in the second effect is selected for the second effect executed after the one second effect, the second effect is indicated in the one second effect. A gaming machine F3 characterized by non-selection of a degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2. That is, when an expectation degree equal to or more than a predetermined expectation degree is selected in one second effect, an expectation shown in the second effect with respect to a second effect executed after the one second effect. When the degree is selected, the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation shown in the second effect is not selected. With this, in the second effect that is executed a plurality of times during the first effect, when the expected degree at which the predetermined identification information appears is equal to or higher than the predetermined expected degree, the second effect performed thereafter is It is possible to prevent the degree of expectation indicated by the effect 2 from being lower than the predetermined degree of expectation. Therefore, after an expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree is shown in one second effect among the second effects executed a plurality of times during the first effect, a predetermined expectation degree is obtained in another second effect. By exhibiting the degree of expectation lower than the degree, there is an effect that loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, the first effect indicates that the predetermined identification information appears. And the selecting means is configured to select at least one degree of expectation shown in the second effect for one second effect performed during the first period. A gaming machine G1 wherein an expectation degree lower than an expectation degree shown in a second effect executed before the second effect during the first period is not selected.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, and F1 to F3. The first effect is configured to have a first period indicating that predetermined identification information appears, and the first effect is performed for one second effect performed during the first period. In the case of selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, the selecting means determines that the degree of expectation lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed before the second effect at least during the first period Will be deselected. Thereby, when the first period is in the first period, at least during the first period, a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in a certain second stage, and thereafter, in the second stage, , The same degree of expectation as the predetermined degree of expectation or a higher degree of expectation. Accordingly, in a plurality of second effects performed during the first period indicating that the predetermined identification information appears, the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears will be high, Since it is possible to prevent the degree from being lowered, it is possible to determine the expected degree of winning in each second production unit executed during one first production while preventing the player from being distracted. There is.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, the first effect indicates that the predetermined identification information appears. The second effect includes a sixth effect executed in accordance with the first period and an operation of the operation means by the player during the first period. And a seventh effect performed when the expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selecting device in the sixth effect. A gaming machine G2 wherein a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is not selected as the degree of expectation to be indicated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, and F1 to F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first effect is configured to have a first period indicating that predetermined identification information appears, and the second effect is a second effect executed in accordance with the first period. In the effect of No. 6, when the expectation degree of a specific rank is selected by the selecting means, the seventh effect which is the second effect executed when the player operates the operating means during the first period. As the degree of expectation shown in the effect, a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is not selected by the selecting means. Thereby, when the sixth effect indicating the degree of expectation of the specific rank is executed in accordance with the first period, in the seventh effect executed when the operating means is operated by the player, Expectations above a certain rank are shown. Therefore, during the first period, the degree of expectation indicated in the second effect (the sixth effect and the seventh effect) can be secured to a specific rank at a minimum, and thereafter, by operating the operation means, 7, there is an effect that the player can expect that the degree of expectation is further increased.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1, and G2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. . Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1, and G2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. H2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

Any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1, and G2, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine H3, characterized in that: Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a variation effect (dynamic display of identification information) is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device so as to enhance the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters (a starting prize) a ball at an entrance (starting opening). A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed, the symbols and the like displayed based on predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are predetermined at a predetermined stop position. If you do, it will cause a hit.
There is also a gaming machine that not only displays a fluctuating effect on the display means, but also executes an effect that indicates a winning expectation to the player during the fluctuating effect. In many of such gaming machines, an effect that indicates a winning degree of expectation to a player is executed a plurality of times during one variable effect. By this, even if a fluctuation production with a long fluctuation time is performed, the player can display the expected degree of winning during the fluctuation production several times, so that the player does not get bored, The game can be played while enhancing the feeling. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2007-312981)
In a conventional gaming machine, when an effect indicating a winning expectation to a player is executed a plurality of times during a variable effect, the pattern of the effect performed a plurality of times is collectively determined at the start of the change. On the other hand, there is a method of determining the expected degree of winning in each effect unit.
However, when determining the expected degree of win in each effect unit during one variable effect, there may be a case where an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed after an effect with a high expected degree is performed once. As a result, the player realizes that despite the fact that the player once increased the expectation of winning, the player may be less likely to win, and is disappointed with the interest in the game. May be distorted.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., while suppressing the interest in the game from being distracted, and the expected degree of winning in each effect unit during one variable effect It is intended to provide a gaming machine that can determine the game machine.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
151 Comment display (third production)
152 Child Character Appearance (4th Direction)
153 Super Reach Selection 154 Character Appearance (4th Direction)
155 Cut-in (3rd production, 5th production)
222b judgment upper limit value pointer (boundary value defining means)
222c Rank judgment table (storage means)
222c1 First rank determination table (second storage means)
222c2 to c5 Second to fifth rank determination tables (first storage means)
223d Notice Direction Counter (Counter)
223f second pointer (rank information storage means)
223h Notice effect counter maximum value memory (boundary value storage means)
223i Judgment rank memory (rank storage means)
S1207 Change start processing (selection means)
S1404 (acquisition means)
S1907 Frame button input monitoring processing (operation receiving means)
S1909 notice effect processing (second effect execution means)
S1913 Counter update processing (update means)
S1914 Change setting processing (first effect execution means)
S2114 (part of rank information storage control means)
S2135 Notice effect rank determination processing (selection means)
S2142 (judgment means)
S2144 (part of rank information storage control means)
S2146 (Discontinuation means)
S2151 (Boundary value storage control means)
S2182 (Determining means)
S2183 (rank storage control means)

Claims (1)

An acquisition unit for acquiring random information in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, and a selection unit for selecting a type of a variable effect that is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Main control means, and according to an instruction from the main control means, comprising a sub-control means having a variable effect execution means for executing the variable effect based on the type of the variable effect selected by the selection means, the When predetermined identification information appears in the variable production executed by the variable production execution means, in a gaming machine for providing a predetermined game value to a player,
The sub-control means,
Suggestion effect execution means for executing a plurality of predetermined suggestion effects for indicating a degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect during execution of the one fluctuation effect by the fluctuation effect execution means. When,
Selecting means for selecting an expected degree type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means for each of the predetermined suggestion effects,
The predetermined suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears due to a difference in display type when displaying the display mode,
The selecting means,
It is possible to select all types of the display type for the first predetermined indication effect in the fluctuation effect,
A counter updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined update timing,
Defining means for storing a boundary value in a case where a predetermined range in which the counter is updated is associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed in the predetermined suggestion effect, for each of the display types;
A determination unit configured to determine, in the order of expectation, whether to select the display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed, based on the boundary value and the value of the counter;
When the determination unit determines that a specific display type is to be selected as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed, the information storage unit stores information on the specific display type,
The gaming machine is
In the selection of the display type in the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed, when determining whether to select a predetermined display type based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, the predetermined display type, When the specific display type stored in the information storage means is the same, means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestive effect,
Operating means operable by a player,
One of the predetermined suggestion effects including the plurality of types of effects having the different display modes is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit when the operation unit is operated.
As the predetermined suggestion effect that is executed after execution of the one suggestion effect in the variation effect in which the one suggestion effect is executed, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the fluctuation effect was started. A game machine including an effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

Images